- Manuals
- Brands
- Acura
- SUV
- MDX Sport Hybrid
- Navigation Manual
Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual PDF
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd., reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.
Accessories Precautions
The GPS antenna is located in the roof. Trees, tall buildings, freeway/highway overpasses, tunnels, or overhead electrical power wires can easily interrupt or interfere with GPS reception.
Signal noise from devices such as radar detectors, vehicle tracking devices, remote starters, and additional amplifiers can disrupt the navigation system. If you install any such item, install it away from the navigation display and antenna.
Important Safety Information
Avoid focusing on the screen or manually operating the system controls while driving.
Enter information before you begin driving or when stopped. As you drive, listen to the audible instructions and use voice commands when possible. Pull to the side of the road if you need more time to look at the screen or operate the controls.
Route guidance may conflict with street closures, road construction, detours, and out-of-date map data.
The system itself may also have limitations. Verify route information by carefully observing roads, signs, and signals. Always use your own judgment and obey traffic laws.
2 System Limitations P. 402
NOTICE This vehicles navigation system display, if so equipped, includes mercury-containing components. Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose of as hazardous waste. Clean the screen with a soft, damp cloth. You may use a mild cleaner intended for use on the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
3 WARNING Using the navigation system while driving can take your attention away from the road, causing a crash in which you could be seriously injured or killed.
Only operate system controls when the conditions permit you to safely do so.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 0
00X31-TRX-8000 2017 MDX Sport Hybrid BNV-03718
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 1
Contents Quick Reference Guide
Start-up 22 Voice Control System 24 Interface Settings 28 Personal Information 40 Routing 55 Guidance 64 Map 71 On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM 89 Customized Features 90 Data Reset 123
2 Navigation P. 125 Entering a Destination 126 Calculating the Route 151 Driving to Your Destination 154 Map Menu 161 Changing Your Route 168 Changing Your Destination 177 Resuming Your Trip 180
2 Audio P. 181 Audio System 182 Audio Remote Controls 188 Audio Settings 190 Playing FM/AM Radio 194 Playing SiriusXM Radio 200 Playing a Disc 220 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio 227 Playing an iPod 239 Playing Internet Radio 251 Playing a USB Flash Drive 256 Playing Bluetooth Audio 262
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 265 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink 266 Text/E-mail Message 300 Roadside Assistance 307 HFL Menus 308
2 AcuraLink Messages P. 313 AcuraLink 314
2 Rear Entertainment System* P. 325 Rear Entertainment System 326 Rear Control Panel Operation 329 Front Control Panel Operation 338 Wireless Headphones 342
2 Other Features P. 345 Trip Computer 346 Power Distribution Monitor 347 Calendar 350 Information Functions 351 Multi-View Rear Camera* 353 Surround View Camera* 355 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 380
2 Troubleshooting P. 383 Troubleshooting 384 Error Messages 391
2 Reference Information P. 399 System Initialization 400 System Limitations 402 Client Assistance 404 Legal Information 407
2 Voice Commands P. 413 Voice Commands 414
P. 2
System Setup P. 21
Navigation P. 125
Audio P. 181
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 265
AcuraLink Messages P. 313
Rear Entertainment System* P. 325
Other Features P. 345
Troubleshooting P. 383
Reference Information P. 399
Voice Commands P. 413
Index P. 419
2
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 2
Quick Reference Guide
OverviewFunctions at a Glance Navigation You can select any place/landmark as a destination by using voice control or the Interface Dial. The navigation
system gives you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination.
Store home address (P48) Register 1 home address.
Track route (P154) Follow your route in real-time with voice guidance.
Traffic Information*1 (P165)
View and avoid congestion and traffic incidents. *1: Available only in certain areas.
AcuraLink Real-Time TrafficTM (P165)
Bypass congestion and traffic incidents.
U.S. models
Canadian models
Subscription service
Store contacts (P41) Store up to 200 contacts in 2 address books.
Enter destination (P126) Select your destination using 13 methods.
Select route (P153) Set route preferences and select one of 3 routes.
Avoid certain areas (P62) Set streets and areas to detour around.
Add waypoints (P170) Add up to 4 pit stops along your route.
3
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 3
Rear seat passengers can enjoy a completely separate entertainment source than front passengers, including movies, games, and other audio choices.
Audio The advanced audio system provides clear, well-defined sound and makes the most of your music. Enjoy listening to a variety of audio sources, such as:
Rear Entertainment System*(P325)
FM/AM Radio (P194)
SiriusXM Radio (P200)
Compact Disc (P220)
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) (P227)
iPod (P239)
Internet Radio (P251)
Bluetooth Audio (P262)
USB Flash Drive (P256)
AcuraLink(P314)
AcuraLink provides you with important information and messages between your vehicle and Acura.
Voice Control (P24)
Use voice commands for safer system control while driving. You can operate all key functions of the navigation, audio, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink, and climate control systems.
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink(P266)
Pair a compatible mobile phone to receive incoming and make outgoing calls. You can operate the phone features without ever taking your hands off the wheel.
* Not available on all models
4
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 4
System Controls
REAR
NAV
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTMAudio/Information Screen
Navigation Voice Control Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Rear Entertainment System mc AUDIO Button (P182)
lg Microphone (P266)
li SOURCE Button (P188)
7 Interface Dial/ENTER Button (P7)
5 BACK Button
8 INFO Button
lj (Pick-Up) Button (P266)
9 MENU Button la SETTINGS Button
4 NAV Button
1 PHONE Button (P266)
ma (Hang-Up/Back) Button (P266)
mb (Talk) Button (P6)
6 (Display Mode) Button (P76)
2 (Power) Button
lf (Eject) Button
lh Left Selector Wheel (P188)
3 Volume Knob
Models with Surround View Camera System
lb CAMERA Button
Models with RES
lc FRONT AUDIO Button ld REAR AUDIO Button
(P329)
le REAR (Power) Button Models without RES
Audio
5
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 5
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM Basic Operation ShortcutsSource More
Places (P46)
Phone (P279)
Audio (P186)
Select to change an audio source.
You can change the position of icons.
Select to display the menu items.
FM/AM/SiriusXM/Pandora*/AhaTM
:
:
Select the preset station (FM/AM/Pandora*/Aha). Select to search that category/channel on the tune screen (SiriusXM). Select and hold to search that station/channel on the preset screen (AM/FM/SiriusXM). Select and hold to search up or down 10 channels on the tune screen (SiriusXM). Select to search the selected band for a station with a strong signal. (AM/FM) Select a song (Pandora*) or contents (Aha).
Select and hold a desired number where you want to store the station/channel. Select to listen to a preset station/channel.
Select Tune.
Select Presets.
Select to display the shortcut menu.
CD/HDD/USB flash drive/Bluetooth Audio :
:
Select to skip to the next folder and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
Select to change tracks. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
iPod Album bar:
: Select an album.
Select to change tracks. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.
: Select the channel. In channel mode, select and hold to change the channel rapidly. (SiriusXM) Select to skip to the next/previous channel on the tune screen. Select and hold to fast-forward/fast-rewind the current selection on tune screen (SiriusXM).
* Not available on all models
6
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 6
Voice Control Operation
Voice Portal Screen
a Press and release the (Talk) button on the top screen of any mode. The system prompts you to say a voice command and gives examples. Press and release the (Talk) button again to bypass this prompt.
The system beeps when ready for a command. Press the (Hang-Up/ Back) button to cancel.
Available voice commands are highlighted on the screen.
b Say a voice command. After that follow the voice prompt and say a voice command.
The audio system is muted during voice control mode.
You can use other voice commands on the Voice Portal screen. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available navigation voice commands (P414)
Say Voice Help to enter supported commands for the current screen. A voice help tutorial is also available. Voice Help (P17)
During the voice control mode, press and hold the (Hang-Up/Back) button to return to the Voice Portal screen.
Set Voice Prompt to Off to bypass the voice prompt. Voice Recognition Settings (P26)
Carefully read the usage note for the voice control. Voice Control System (P24)
7
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 7
Interface Dial/ENTER Button Operation
FRONT AUDIO
Rotate dial
Changes scale Map screens
Press ENTER
Selects function Selects map icon Map screens
Move
up down left rightHighlights menu options Menu screens Selects highlighted option
Menu screens
Selecting Icon
You will see these icons in each chapter. They represent how you can operate the Interface Dial.
Move up Move left Move right
Scrolls map (8 directions) Map screens
Selects labeled function Menu screens
Rotate dial
Press ENTER
Move down
8
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 8
How to Enter Information You can enter information (e.g. city names, street names, personal names, business names comprising letters, numbers, and symbols) when prompted on the input screen.
Using the Interface Dial Rotate to highlight a character.
Select to display upper/lower case characters.
Select to display symbols and accented characters.
Select (or move ) to edit the entered characters.
Press to enter the highlighted character.
Move to select Space to enter a space character.
Move to select Delete to remove the last entered character.
You can also use the touchscreen to enter information.
Certain screen functions are limited or inoperable while the vehicle is moving. For these functions, use available voice commands or pull over to proceed.
Certain screen functions are limited or inoperable while the vehicle is moving.
Number of Hits
On input search screens, the number of hits in the map database is displayed. Move to select OK to display a list of possible entries.
U.S. models
Canadian models
9
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 9
Map Screen Legend
GPS signal strength
Best reception
Feature areas
Park
Streets
Map scale (P83)
No icon: Poor/No reception
Good reception
Hospital Shopping Mall Golf Course Airport
Body of Water Cemetery University
Current street nameCurrent vehicle position (P81)
Freeway/highway
State route
Road
Unverified road
Scenic road
Acura dealer
AcuraLink Message icon (P15)
AcuraLink signal indicator (P324)
Landmark icons (P73)
Honda dealer (U.S.)
Honda dealer (Canada)
School Parking lot
Gas station
Hospital
Post office
Restaurant
Freeway exit information (U.S.) / Highway exit information (Canada)
Parking garage
Grocery store
Hotel/Lodging
ATM
Map orientation (P78)
North up
Current map scale
Heading up
3D map
Pedestrian street
State line
One-way
Industrial complex Military Base
10
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 10
Traffic Information*/AcuraLink Real-Time Traffic*
Displays continuously updated traffic information and recalculates your route in response to traffic flow, incidents, or road closures. Traffic information is only available in certain areas. (P165)
Traffic information available
Traffic information off or map scale too large
No icon: Out of coverage area
Traffic incident icons
Traffic status indicator
Traffic flow indicator
Congestion
Incident
Weather
Heavy Moderate
Free-flow Construction
Road Closed
NOTE: AcuraLink Real-Time TrafficTM is a subscription service. For more information, contact an Acura dealer or visit www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink.
Canadian models
Q u
ick R efe
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 11
During Route Guidance During route guidance, route information is displayed on the map screen and guidance screen.
Press the NAV button to toggle between the map and guidance screen.
11
ren ce G
u id
e
Map Screen
Guidance Screen
Guide to destination or waypoint
Estimated time to destination (waypoint)
Distance to destination (waypoint) Distance of the actual route. Waypoint (P170)
Tracking dots (P158)
Next guidance indicator Distance to the next guidance point. Calculated route (unverified roads) (P156)
Destination icon
Calculated route (P154)
Guide to destination or waypoint
Estimated time to destination (waypoint)
Distance to destination (waypoint) Distance of the actual route.
Guidance point
Guidance point
No entry icon
Guidance indicator Street name of guidance point and distance to the guidance point.
Lane guidance
Day or Night Mode Press the (Display Mode) button to manually switch between day and night mode.
Turn-by-Turn Directions The next guidance point appears on the multi-information display.
Day mode Night mode
Multi-information Display
Remaining distance
Street name of next guidance point
Next driving maneuver is approaching
* Not available on all models
12
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 12
NavigationHome Addresses and Going Home The Home feature automatically routes you to your home address from any location simply by selecting Go Home.
Storing Your Home Address
a Press the SETTINGS button.
b Rotate to select Navi Settings. Press .
c Rotate to select Edit Go Home. Press .
d Rotate to select Name. Press .
e Enter a name.
f Rotate to select Address. Press .
g Enter an address.
h Rotate to select Phone No. Press .
i Enter a phone number.
j Move and rotate to select OK. Press .
Going Home
a From the map screen, press the MENU button.
b Rotate to select Go Home. Press .
c Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press .
Q u
ick R efe
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 13
NavigationEntering a Destination Enter your destination using one of several methods, then follow route guidance on the map or guidance screen to your destination.
13
ren ce G
u id
e
a From the map screen, press the MENU button.
b Rotate to select Address. Press .
c Rotate to select Street. Press .
d Enter the name of your destination street.
e Rotate to select your destination street from the list. Press .
f Enter the street number. Move to select OK when finished.
g If there is more than one city with the specified street, a list of cities is displayed. Rotate to select the desired city from the list. Press .
h Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press . Route guidance to the destination begins.
View Routes: Choose one of three routes.
Route Preference: Choose Max or Min for the five settings.
14
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 14
NavigationChanging Route or Destination You can alter your route by adding waypoints to visit, adding streets to avoid, or changing your destination during route guidance.
Adding a Waypoint (Pit Stop) You can add up to four waypoints along your route. (P170)
a From the map screen, press the MENU button.
b Rotate to select Destination List. Press .
c Rotate to select Add New Destination. Press .
d Rotate to select Find Along Route. Press .
e Rotate to select location and search method. Press .
Search Around: Search around a location.
Search Along: Search between two locations.
Changing Your Destination There are several methods you can use to specify a new destination during route guidance.
Selecting an icon on the map (P178) Scroll the map to position the cursor over a place/landmark icon or a new area on the map. Press twice.
Entering a new destination (P179) Press the MENU button. Move to select Destination and enter a new destination.
f Select the icon category and location to add to the Destination List when prompted. Edit the order of destinations if necessary.
g Move and rotate to select Start Route. Press .
Canceling Your Route
a Press the MENU button.
b Rotate to select Cancel Route. Press .
15
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 15
AcuraLink AcuraLink Messages AcuraLink provides a direct communication link between you and Acura. It sends and receives several kinds of messages through the Acura server.
The following features are available:
Vehicle feature guide
Operating quick tips
Safety and maintenance information
Diagnostic information
Dealer appointment and maintenance reminders
16
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 16
Rear Entertainment System* (P325) The rear passengers can enjoy a wide array of audio/visual sources with the Rear Entertainment System (RES). The rear passengers can use wireless headphones and operate the system with the rear control panel.
Overhead Screen and Rear Control Panel
Press the Open button to open and pull down the screen.
Press the Release button to remove the rear control panel.
Rotate the Interface Dial to select items.
Select the audio source.
(Power) Button Turn the system on or off (when rear power is turned on).
CH/FOLDER Bar Select a channel (Radio) or a folder (Disc/USB).
CATEGORY Bar Select a category (SiriusXM).
TUNE/SKIP Bar Find stations (FM/AM). Skip to the start/end of tracks or press and hold to fast reverse/fast forward (Disc/USB/DVD).
(Play/Pause) Button Play or pause the playback.
TITLE SCROLL Button Display track title, artist, and other text information.
(Light-up) Button Illuminate the buttons on the rear control panel.
Basic Operation
a Open the overhead screen.
b Press the REAR (Power) button on the front control panel.
c Select the audio source. Press the SOURCE button and rotate the Interface Dial on the rear control panel to select an audio source. Press the ENTER button.
REAR
Q u
ick R efe
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 17
Voice Help This navigation system comes with voice help, which shows you what command to say when using the voice command functions.
17
ren ce G
u id
e
Command Help
a Press and release the (Talk) button.
b Say Voice Help.
The voice help screen is displayed. The Voice Help command is available on most screens.
c Say one of the options for a list of available commands by category (e.g.,
Navigation Commands).
d Say one of the options for a list of available commands by category (e.g.,
Find Place Commands).
e The system displays a list of all available commands for the category. Press to hear the list read aloud.
Getting Started Tutorial
a Move and rotate to select Getting Started on the voice help screen. Press .
For Voice Settings and All Commands. (P26, 414)
b The system reads the tips for the voice control.
Rotate to read the tips.
Move or to display the previous/next page.
* Not available on all models
18
Q u
ick R eferen
ce G u
id e
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 18
Troubleshooting For more Information (P383)
Why does the vehicle position icon on the map lag a short distance behind my actual position, especially at intersections?
This is normal. The navigation system is unaware of the width of intersections. Large differences in vehicle position can indicate a temporary loss of the GPS signal.
Why does the time to destination display sometimes increase even though I am getting closer to my destination?
The time to destination is based on your actual road speed and traffic conditions to give you a better estimate of arrival time.
How do I specify a destination when an entered city or street could not be found?
Try entering the street first. Some cities are lumped in with a major metro area. In rural unverified areas or new subdivisions, streets may be missing or only partially numbered.
How do I turn on the navigation system voice guidance?
On the map screen, press to display the Map Menu. Rotate to select Guidance Volume. Adjust it to the preferred volume level.
My battery was disconnected or went dead and the navigation system is asking for a code. Where do I find it?
In most cases you do not need to enter a code. Simply press and hold the (Power) button for two seconds; the system should reactivate.
2 System Initialization P. 400
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 19
19
How to Use This Manual This section explains different methods on how you can easily find information in this manual.
Searching the Table of Contents (P1)
First, find the general chapter related to what you are looking for (e.g., entering a destination from the Address Book). Then, go to that chapter to view a more specific table of contents.
Searching the Index (P419)
This more detailed table of contents shows you exactly what information is listed by section and title.
The Index consists of main terms and sub-entries. The sub-entries help you get to the desired page depending on what you are looking for.
Table of Contents Chapter Contents
Audio/Information Screen Index
Two types of Tables of Contents help you find your desired information.
Menu items displayed on the audio/ information screen (e.g., Address Book) can be found individually in the Index.
More Detailed Contents
Go to the Next page
20
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 20
Press the hard button on the system control panel.
Menu Tree
The menu tree helps guide you through the system's menu options. To get to your desired function, follow the menu tree in order of the steps shown.
All menu options can also be activated with voice commands.
Press the MENU button.
Select the menu option with the Interface Dial.
After following the menu tree, step-by-step instructions explain how to achieve the desired result.
Sample pages and images in this section may differ from the actual ones.
Rotate to select Address Book. Press .
MENU button Address Book
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 21
System Setup
This section describes the start-up procedure and the navigation and setup functions.
21
Start-up ................................................... 22 Voice Control System ............................. 24
Command Input .................................... 24 Voice Recognition .................................. 25 Voice Recognition Settings ..................... 26 Siri Eyes Free .......................................... 27
Interface Settings ................................... 28 Personal Information.............................. 40
Address Book......................................... 41 Home Address ....................................... 48 PIN Numbers .......................................... 49 Previous Destination............................... 50 Category History .................................... 51 Download POI........................................ 52
Routing .....................................................55 Route Preference ....................................56 Unverified Routing ..................................58 Traffic Rerouting .....................................60 Edit POI Search Radius Along Route ........61 Avoided Area..........................................62
Guidance ..................................................64 Guidance Mode ......................................65 Street Name Guidance ............................67 Non-map Screens....................................68 Guidance Point .......................................69 Estimated Time .......................................70
Map...........................................................71 Showing Icons on Map ...........................73
Color ..................................................... 75 View (Map Orientation) .......................... 78 3D Angle Adjustment............................. 79 Straight Line Guide ................................ 80 Current Location .................................... 81 Map Legend........................................... 82 Display Tracking ..................................... 86 Correct Vehicle Position ......................... 88
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM ........... 89 Changing the Screen Settings ................ 89
Customized Features .............................. 90 Data Reset ............................................. 123
Defaulting All the Settings.................... 123
22
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 22
Start-up
1 Start-up
If the navigation system loses power at any time, you may need to press and hold the (Power) button for more than two seconds, or you may be prompted for the five-digit security code.
2 System Initialization P. 400
At start-up, the drivers keyless access remote is automatically detected and the address book settings, setup preferences, wallpapers, and audio settings for that driver (e.g., Driver 1) are loaded.
OK on the Confirmation screen cannot be selected by using a voice command.
The first time the NAV or any other mode button is pressed after you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON, a message guiding you to its menu screen is displayed.
The navigation system starts automatically when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following Confirmation screen is displayed.
1. Press to select OK. u If you do not select OK, the
map screen is displayed after a certain period of time.
u Your current position is displayed on the map screen.
2. Press the NAV button if a different mode is selected. u Your current position is
displayed on the map screen.
uuStart-upu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 23
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option using the Interface Dial until the vehicle is stopped. Voice commands are still operable while the vehicle is in motion.
Limitations for Manual Operation
Disabled option
U.S. models
23
24
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 24
Voice Control System
1 Voice Control System
When you press the (Talk) button, the system prompts you to say a voice command and gives examples. Press and release the (Talk) button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.
1 Command Input
The audio system is muted while using the voice control system.
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation for most of the navigation system functions. The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (Hang-Up/Back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling. A Getting Started feature provides a tutorial that explains how to use the voice control system.
2 Getting Started Tutorial P. 17
Command Input If the system does not understand a command or you wait too long to give a command, the system asks you to repeat the command. When you give a command, the system generally either repeats the command as a confirmation or asks you for further information. If you do not wish to hear this feedback, you can turn it off. However, listening to the feedback will help familiarize you with the way the system expects commands to be phrased. If the system cannot perform a command or the command is not appropriate for the screen you are on, the system beeps. On character input screens, a list of possible characters is displayed if the system does not recognize your command. You can find out which voice commands are available for a particular screen using the Voice Help command. The system will display and read the list of available commands to you.
2 Voice Help P. 17
uuVoice Control SystemuVoice Recognition System
Setu p
1 Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the drivers seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passengers side.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 25
Voice Recognition To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control system: Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available navigation voice command.
2 Voice Commands P. 414
Close the windows and moonroof. Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling. Speak in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words. Reduce any background noise and the climate controls fan speed if possible. The
system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
Refer to the Voice Help feature. 2 Voice Help P. 17
25
26
uuVoice Control SystemuVoice Recognition Settings
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 26
Voice Recognition Settings H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Voice Reco
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Voice Prompt: Turns the voice prompt on or off.
On (factory default): Provides the voice prompts. Off: Disables the feature.
Song By Voice: Turns the Song By VoiceTM on or off. 2 Settings Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 246
Song By Voice Phonetic Modification: Modifies a voice command of music stored in the HDD or an iPod.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 248
Phonebook Phonetic Modification: Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 282
Guidance Volume: Adjusts the voice prompt volume level. 2 Sound and Beep Settings P. 29
uuVoice Control SystemuSiri Eyes Free System
Setu p
1 Siri Eyes Free
iPhone and Siri are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Siri Eyes Free is available only on iPhone with iOS 6.0 and above.
Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.
Some features may not be available for all countries or all areas. For details about Siri, refer to http:// www.apple.com.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Eyes Free mode while operating a vehicle.
On Siri Eyes Free, the display remains the same and no feedback or commands appear.
While using Siri, you cannot operate the system with the built-in voice recognition.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 27
Siri Eyes Free When your compatible iPhone is paired and linked to the system via Bluetooth, you can say Siri-related commands. Make sure the Siri feature on your iPhone is turned on.
2 Pairing a Phone P. 269
1. Press and hold the (Talk) button for more than two seconds until you hear the Siri tone.
2. Talk to Siri. u When you hear the Siri tone,
you can continue to respond without pressing any button. If the Siri tone times out, you have to press and hold the (Talk) button again to reactivate Siri Eyes Free.
u Press the (Hang-Up/Back) button to cancel Siri Eyes Free.
27
28
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 28
Interface Settings
1 Display Settings
You can set separate daytime and nighttime settings for Brightness, Contrast, and Black Level. Adjust each setting when the display is in either daytime or nighttime mode.
Display Settings H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Display
Adjusts the screens preferences. 1. Rotate to select an item. Press
. 2. Rotate to make the
adjustment. Press .
The following items are available: Sync Display Brightness: Selects whether the display brightness synchronizes
with the instrument panel brightness. Brightness: Adjusts the screens brightness. Contrast: Adjusts the screens contrast. Black Level: Adjusts the screens black level.
uu Interface SettingsuSound and Beep Settings System
Setu p
1 Sound and Beep Settings
Guidance Volume If you set Guidance Volume to 0, you will not hear route guidance or voice command confirmations. You can adjust Guidance Volume by rotating the volume knob while the route guidance or voice command confirmations are announced.
If you then select Voice in the Map Menu, you will hear route guidance at the default volume.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 29
Sound and Beep Settings H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Sound/Beep
Changes the system sound and beep settings. Rotate to select an item. Press
.
The following items are available: Guidance Volume: Adjusts the navigation system volume level. Verbal Reminder: Turns the verbal reminders on and off.
On: Sets the verbal reminders. Off: Disables the feature.
29
30
uu Interface SettingsuClock Adjustment
System Setu
p
1 Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone If you live and work in two different time zones, you may want to turn Auto Time Zone to Off. When driving near a time zone boundary, the displayed time zone may fluctuate between the two zone times.
Auto Daylight This function is not activated in areas that have not adopted daylight saving time, even if you have set Auto Daylight to On.
You can turn the clock display in the audio/ information screen on and off.
2 Header Clock Display P. 39
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 30
Clock Adjustment H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Clock
Set the automatic adjustment of the system clock for daylight saving and international time zones.
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Clock/Wallpaper Type: Changes the clock display type and the wallpaper type.
2 Setting the Clock Type P. 31
Clock Adjustment: Adjust the current time manually. 2 Setting the Clock P. 31
Clock Format: Sets the time notation to either 12-hour clock (12H, factory default) or 24-hour clock (24H).
Auto Time Zone: The navigation system automatically adjusts the clock when driving through different time zones. On (factory default): Adjusts the clock automatically. Off: Disables the feature.
Auto Daylight: The navigation system automatically adjusts the clock (spring ahead or fall back by one hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs. On (factory default): Adjusts the clock automatically. Off: Disables the feature.
Clock Reset: Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group.
uuInterface SettingsuClock Adjustment System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 31
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Clock u Clock/Wallpaper Type u Clock
1. Rotate to select an option to change the design. Press .
2. Move to select OK. Press .
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Clock u Clock Adjustment
1. Rotate to select an item. Press .
2. Rotate to select a minute. Press .
Setting the Clock Type
Setting the Clock
31
32
uu Interface SettingsuWallpaper Settings
System Setu
p
1 Wallpaper Settings
When importing wallpaper files, the image must be in the USB flash drives root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 255 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 10 MB. The maximum image size is 5,800 5,800 pixels. Up to 10 files can be saved for each driver (Driver 1
and Driver 2). If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 32
Wallpaper Settings Select, delete, and import wallpaper pictures for display on the screen.
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Clock u Clock/Wallpaper Type
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2. Move to select Wallpaper. u The screen will change to the
wallpaper list. 3. Move and rotate to select
Add New Wallpaper. Press .
4. Rotate to select a desired picture. Press . u The preview is displayed on the
left side on the screen. 5. Move and rotate to select
Start Import. Press . u The confirmation message will
appear. Then the display will return to the wallpaper list.
Import Wallpaper
uu Interface SettingsuWallpaper Settings System
Setu p
1 Select Wallpaper
From the pop-up menu, rotate to select Preview and press to see a preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press to select OK, or press the BACK button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 33
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Clock u Clock/Wallpaper Type u Wallpaper
1. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper. Press . u The preview is displayed on the
left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen.
2. Rotate to select Set. Press . u The display will return to the
wallpaper list.
Select Wallpaper
Continued 33
34
uu Interface SettingsuWallpaper Settings
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 34
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Clock u Clock/Wallpaper Type u Wallpaper
1. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete. Press . u The preview is displayed on the
left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen.
2. Rotate to select Delete. Press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate to select Yes. Press . u The display will return to the
wallpaper list.
Delete Wallpaper
uu Interface SettingsuUnit Settings System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 35
Unit Settings H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Others u Units
Sets the map units to either mile or km. Rotate to select the map unit. Press .
35
36
uu Interface SettingsuLanguage Settings
System Setu
p
1 Language Settings
Voice confirmation of cities and streets only occurs when English is the system language.
When Franais or Espaol is selected, some messages continue to be displayed in English.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 36
Language Settings H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Others u Language
Set the system language used on all screens. You can choose from three languages: English, Franais (French), Espaol (Spanish).
Rotate to select the system language. Press .
uu Interface SettingsuOperation Restriction Tips* System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 37
Operation Restriction Tips*
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Others u Operation Restriction Tips
Alerts you when manual control of the system is disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only voice commands are available.
Rotate to select the map unit. Press .
The following items are available: On (factory default): Displays a message. Off: Disables the message.
37* Not available on all models
38
uu Interface SettingsuBackground Color
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 38
Background Color H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Others u Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/information screen and the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
Rotate to select a desired color. Press .
uu Interface SettingsuHeader Clock Display System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 39
Header Clock Display H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Others u Header Clock Display
Selects whether the clock display comes on. Rotate to select an option. Press
.
The following options are available: On (factory default): The system displays the clock in the audio/information
screen. Off: Disables the feature.
39
40
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 40
Personal Information
1 Personal Information
Personal information cannot be backed up or moved to another navigation system.
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info
Use the personal information menu to select and set your address books, home address, and PINs. You can also delete unwanted destinations from the list of previously routed destinations.
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Address Book: Stores new addresses or edits your address book.
2 Address Book P. 41
Edit Go Home: Sets or edits your home address. 2 Home Address P. 48
PIN Number: Sets or changes your PIN. 2 PIN Numbers P. 49
Previous Destination: Deletes the destination history. 2 Previous Destination P. 50
Category History: Deletes the place categories you recently used. 2 Category History P. 51
Download POI: Edits and deletes the Imported POI categories. 2 Download POI P. 52
uuPersonal InformationuAddress Book System
Setu p
1 Address Book
Up to 200 addresses can be stored to each address book of Driver 1 and Driver 2 separately.
If you have PIN-protected your address book, enter your PIN when prompted. Press to select OK. PINs are optional.
2 PIN Numbers P. 49
Any address book categories you create are also displayed.
2 Selecting an Address Book Category P. 44
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 41
Address Book H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Address Book
Store up to 200 address entries in two address books (Driver 1 and Driver 2). You can add, edit, and delete information in the address books.
Move or to display only the addresses in the selected category. Move to change the user address book (Driver 1 or Driver 2).
41Continued
uuPersonal InformationuAddress Book
42
System Setu
p
1 Adding an Address Book Entry
If you do not give the address a name, one is automatically assigned (e.g., Address 001). You can re-enter, edit, or make changes to any entry. Address is the only required field.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 42
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Address Book
This section explains how to enter the name and address. 1. Move and rotate to select
Add New Address. Press .
2. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Name: Edits the name of the entry. Address: Edits the address of the entry. Phone No.: Edits the phone number of the entry. Category: Specifies the category of the entry.
Adding an Address Book Entry
uuPersonal InformationuAddress Book System
Setu p
1 Adding an Address Book Entry
When you use Place Name or Place Category, the phone number is automatically entered.
You can also add a phone number and category.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 43
Alert: Alerts you when you approach the address entry. On: Beeps and displays a message when your vehicle gets near the entry. Off (factory default): Disables the feature.
3. Rotate to select Name. Press .
4. Enter a name or title. Move to select OK.
5. Rotate to select Address. Press .
6. Rotate to select an item for specifying the address. Press .
The following items are available: Address: Enter an address on the character input screen when prompted.
2 Address P. 128
Previous Destinations: Select a previous destination. 2 Previous Destination P. 136
Current Position: Select your current location. Place Category: Select a category to search for a place/landmark (e.g., Banking,
Lodging). 2 Place Category P. 137
Local Search: Sets a destination by using Local Search. 2 Local Search P. 139
Place Name: Enter the name of a place/landmark. 2 Place Name P. 141
More Search Methods: Displays additional search method entries. 2 Entering a Destination P. 126
Continued 43
uuPersonal InformationuAddress Book
44
System Setu
p
1 Editing an Address Book Entry
The entered contents are displayed on the Edit address screen.
1 Selecting an Address Book Category
Up to 100 categories (including Unfiled) can be stored to each address book of Driver 1 and Driver 2 separately.
If you delete a category that is used by other addresses, the category type for those addresses changes to Unfiled.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 44
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Address Book
1. Rotate to select the address to edit. Press .
2. Enter the name, address, phone number, and category fields.
2 Adding an Address Book Entry P. 42
3. Move and rotate to select OK. Press .
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Address Book
1. Rotate to select an address. Press .
2. Rotate to select Category. Press .
3. Rotate to select a category. Press . u Create a category in advance.
2 Creating a new category P. 45
Editing an Address Book Entry
Selecting an Address Book Category
uuPersonal InformationuAddress Book System
Setu p
1 Deleting an Address Book Entry
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, delete all address book entries.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 45
Creating a new category 1. Move and rotate to select New Category. Press . 2. Enter a name and select an icon when prompted.
u The created category is displayed in the list of categories.
Deleting or Editing a category 1. Move and rotate to select Delete or Edit. Press . 2. Delete an existing category, or change the name and icon.
u The selected category to delete is indicated with a trash icon. Move and rotate to select OK.
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Address Book
1. Rotate to select the address to delete. Press .
2. Move and rotate to select Delete. Press .
3. Rotate to select Yes. Press to delete the address.
Deleting an Address Book Entry
Continued 45
46
uuPersonal InformationuAddress Book
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 46
You can store up to six addresses previously stored in your Address Book, and a home address for your preset destinations.
Storing an address on the shortcut 1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Select Places. 3. Select Edit or No Entry.
u If you select No Entry, go to step 6.
4. Select Add. u All six preset icons appear.
5. Select the preset number to which you want to store an address. u The screen changes to a list of
addresses stored in your address book.
Setting Place Shortcuts
uuPersonal InformationuAddress Book System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 47
6. Select an address you want to store as a preset.
Deleting a preset address 1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Select Places. 3. Select Edit. 4. Select Delete. 5. Select the preset number with the destination you want to delete.
47
48
uuPersonal InformationuHome Address
System Setu
p
1 Home Address
If you have PIN-protected your home addresses, enter your PIN when prompted. Press to select OK. PINs are optional.
2 PIN Numbers P. 49
If your home street is not in the system database, park on the nearest verified street to your home. When entering the Address field, rotate to select Current Position to use your current location as the home address and press .
You can delete a home address if necessary. Move and rotate to select Clear Home Entry. Press
. Rotate to select Yes. Press .
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, delete all home addresses.
The home icon is shown on the map screen on the 1/20 and 1/8 mile (80 and 200 m) scales.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 48
Home Address H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Edit Go Home
Set a home address that you frequently use. 1. Edit the name, address, and phone
number the same way as an address in the address book.
2 Adding an Address Book Entry P. 42
2. Move and rotate to select OK. Press .
uuPersonal InformationuPIN Numbers System
Setu p
1 PIN Numbers
PIN Personal Identification Number (PIN) is a password used to access personal data.
PINs are optional. If you choose to use a PIN, keep a note of the number in a secure location. If you forget your PIN, a dealer will have to reset the navigation system and all of your stored information will be erased. The factory default is no PIN.
If you want to stop using a PIN, move to select Turn Off PIN Entry. Press .
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 49
PIN Numbers H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u PIN Number
Set a four-digit PIN for protecting personal addresses and your home address. Once you set a PIN, you are prompted to enter it whenever you access a personal address or a home address.
1. Rotate to select the PIN to create. Press .
2. Rotate to select a digit to enter. Press to select OK. Repeat to enter a new four-digit PIN.
3. Re-enter the new PIN, when prompted, to confirm the number you just entered. Press to select OK. u If you have not entered the
same number both times, an INCORRECT PIN message is displayed. Enter your PIN again.
49
50
uuPersonal InformationuPrevious Destination
System Setu
p
1 Previous Destination
Up to 50 destinations can be stored.
To cancel the selection of a previous destination, rotate to highlight the destination again. Press
to de-select it.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 50
Previous Destination H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Previous Destination
The navigation system maintains a list of your previously routed destinations as a shortcut for entering the same destination in the future. You can delete some or all of your previous destinations from the list.
1. Rotate to select the destination to delete. Press . u Repeat the procedure as
necessary. u Items to be deleted are
indicated with a trash icon.
2. Move and rotate to select OK to delete the selected destinations.
Trash icon
uuPersonal InformationuCategory History System
Setu p
1 Category History
Up to 50 categories can be stored.
To cancel the selection of a category, rotate to highlight the category again. Press to de-select it.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 51
Category History H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Category History
The navigation system maintains a list of your recently used place categories as a shortcut for selecting the same categories in the future. You can delete some or all of your recently used categories from the list.
1. Rotate to select the category to delete. Press . u Repeat the procedure as
necessary. u Items to be deleted are
indicated with a trash icon.
2. Move and rotate to select OK to delete the selected categories.
Trash icon
51
52
uuPersonal InformationuDownload POI
System Setu
p
1 Importing POI Categories
For more information about connecting a USB flash drive.
2 Connecting a USB Flash Drive P. 256
POI data in csv and kml formats can be imported.
You can download POI data from various POI websites.
If you select From AcuraLink, you can download POI data from the AcuraLink server.
2 AcuraLink P. 314
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 52
Download POI Import custom Points of Interest (POI) into the navigation system and set the POI as a destination. You can also add, edit, and delete POIs.
H MENU button (on map) u More Search Methods u Download POI
1. Connect a USB flash drive with stored POI data to the USB connector.
2. Move and rotate to select Import from USB. Press .
Importing POI Categories
uuPersonal InformationuDownload POI System
Setu p
1 Editing POI Categories
If you select From AcuraLink, you can edit Alert only.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 53
3. Rotate to select a category to import. Press .
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Personal Info u Download POI
1. Rotate to select the downloaded POI category to edit. Press .
Editing POI Categories
Continued 53
54
uuPersonal InformationuDownload POI
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 54
2. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Alert Setting: Alerts you when you approach the places/landmarks in the
category. On: Beeps and displays a message when your vehicle gets near the places/ landmarks in the category. Off (factory default): Disables the feature.
Delete Category: Deletes all places/landmarks and icon in the selected category. Edit Icon: Changes the category icon.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 55
Routing
Setu p
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Routing
Choose various settings that determine the navigation system functionality during route calculation.
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Route Preference: Changes the route preferences (calculating method).
2 Route Preference P. 56
Unverified Routing: Sets whether you use the route guidance in unverified areas.
2 Unverified Routing P. 58
Traffic Rerouting: Sets whether you use automatic recalculation based on traffic information.
2 Traffic Rerouting P. 60
Edit POI Search Radius Along Route: Sets the distance from the route to find waypoints.
2 Edit POI Search Radius Along Route P. 61
Avoided Area: Specifies areas to avoid when calculating a route. 2 Avoided Area P. 62
55
56
uuRoutinguRoute Preference
System Setu
p
1 Route Preference
The calculated route may be the shortest route or the route you would choose. For safety reasons, the system generally applies the following rules to your route: Shortcuts through residential areas are avoided. Right turns are favored over left turns or U-turns. Time-restricted turns (turns prohibited at certain
times of the day) are not used.
Check the ferry schedule when the calculated route includes ferry route.
ETC is short for the Electronic Toll Collection system.
Server Route*
You can view three routes distributed from AcuraLink.
2 Viewing the Routes P. 153 Set to On and select Optimal Routes to select
your desired route. 2 Optimal Routes* P. 57
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 56
Route Preference H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Routing u Route Preference
Change the route preference by selecting minimum or maximum driving methods. 1. Rotate to select an item. Press
. 2. Rotate to select Min or Max.
Press . u Repeat step 1 and 2 as
necessary. 3. Move to select OK. Press .
* Not available on all models
uuRoutinguRoute Preference System
Setu p
1 Optimal Routes*
Optimal Routes is a subscription service. For more information, contact an Acura dealer or visit www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 57
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Routing u Route Preference
You can select desired routes by sorting the route list. The three top routes can be displayed on the Select a route screen.
2 Viewing the Routes P. 153
1. Move and rotate to select Optimal Routes. Press .
2. Rotate to select a route type. Press .
3. Move and rotate to select OK. Press .
Optimal Routes*
57* Not available on all models
58
uuRoutinguUnverified Routing
System Setu
p
1 Unverified Routing
Unverified roads are found in rural areas, and typically include residential streets away from the center of a town. They may not be accurate, and can contain errors in location, naming, and address range.
Unverified roads are shown only when viewing the map in the 1/20, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1 and 2 (mile) / 80, 200, 400, 800 (m), 1.6 and 3.2 (km) map scales.
Straight line guide
Blue-pink route line
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 58
Unverified Routing H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Routing u Unverified Routing
Receive turn-by-turn map and voice guidance in unverified areas. Rotate to select On or Off. Press
.
Differences Off On (factory default)
On or Off? The driver wishes to manually navigate using the navigation map and choose the streets that lead to the destination.
The driver chooses to let the navigation system suggest possible routing, knowing that the guidance may not be accurate.
Route calculation
Route is usually longer, using verified roads whenever possible.
Route is shorter, but uses unverified (purple) streets that may not be accurate.
uuRoutinguUnverified Routing System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 59
Route line The route line uses verified streets only (when possible). If Straight Line Guide is set to On, a pink vector line is displayed on the map that continually points to your destination.
2 Straight Line Guide P. 80
A blue-pink route line highlights suggested unverified streets on the map while traveling to your destination.
Cautionary messages
Cautionary pop-up screens and voice announcements remind you to obey all traffic restrictions when starting route guidance, approaching an unverified area, and entering an unverified street.
Cautionary pop-up screens and voice announcements remind you to obey all traffic restrictions when entering an unverified street.
Guidance (map/voice)
There is no turn-by-turn map or voice guidance.
Voice guidance commands end with the phrase if possible to remind you to verify all traffic restrictions.
Directions list A direction list is typically not available. However, depending on your route, directions are provided to help you reach the first available verified road.
A direction list is provided showing street names and turn symbols in pink.
Differences Off On (factory default)
59
60
uuRoutinguTraffic Rerouting
System Setu
p
1 Traffic Rerouting
You must be in or near a traffic-enabled city to receive coverage for that area. Traffic information is available in certain areas in the lower 48 states, Hawaii, and some cities in Canada.
2 Traffic Information P. 406
Traffic Rerouting requires an AcuraLink Real-Time TrafficTM subscription.
2 AcuraLink P. 314
Automatic traffic rerouting may not provide a detour route depending on circumstances.
Canadian models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 60
Traffic Rerouting H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Routing u Traffic Rerouting
A faster route can be calculated based on continuously updated traffic information. 2 Traffic ReroutingTM P. 165
Rotate to select an option. Press .
The following options are available: On: The system reroutes automatically based on traffic information. Off (factory default): Disables the feature.
uuRoutinguEdit POI Search Radius Along Route System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 61
Edit POI Search Radius Along Route H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Routing u Edit POI Search Radius
Along Route
Select the distance from your highlighted route line (on either side of your route) that the system will search for a waypoint.
2 Adding Waypoints P. 170
You can specify a different search distance for freeways/highways and surface streets.
1. Rotate to select an item. Press .
2. Rotate to select a search distance. Press .
The following items are available: On Freeways (U.S.)/On highways (Canada): 1, 2, 5, or 10 miles (1.6, 3, 8, or 16
km) can be set. Factory default is 2 miles (3 km). On Surface Streets: 1/2, 1, 2, or 5 miles (0.8, 1.6, 3, or 8 km) can be set. Factory
default is 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
61
62
uuRoutinguAvoided Area
System Setu
p
1 Avoided Area
The maximum size of one side of an avoid area is approximately 1/2 mile (800 m).
If your selected area contains a freeway/highway, you are asked Do you want to avoid freeways (highways)? Answering No allows you to use a route through an avoid area on a freeway/highway without any pop-up messages.
You can select areas to avoid; however, you cannot select roads or areas that you want the system to use for routing.
You can enter up to 25 characters for the name.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 62
Avoided Area H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Routing u Avoided Area
Specify up to five areas to avoid (e.g., road construction, closures), if possible, when the system calculates routes to your destination.
1. Move and rotate to select New Area, or rotate to select an existing area to edit.
2. Rotate to select Name to label the area to avoid. Press .
3. Enter a name or title. Move to select OK.
4. Rotate to select Area to define the area to avoid. Press .
The following options are available (after an area is set): View Area: Displays the selected avoid area on the map. Delete: Deletes the selected avoid area.
uuRoutinguAvoided Area System
Setu p
1 Avoided Area
Avoid area can be set in the 1/20, 1/8, or 1/4 mile (80, 200, or 400 m) map scales.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 63
5. Rotate to select a method for specifying the area. Press .
The following options are available: Address: Specify the general area by entering an address.
2 Address P. 128
Map Input: Specify the general area by map input. 2 Map Input P. 148
6. If you select Map Input, scroll the map to position the cursor over your desired start point, adjusting the map scale as necessary. Press
to mark the start point. u To redo the area selection,
press the BACK button. 7. Scroll the map to draw the area.
Press to mark the end point. 8. Press to select OK.
u The area you specify is displayed in the list of areas to avoid.
Cursor
Avoid area
63
64
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 64
Guidance
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Guidance
Choose various settings that determine the navigation system functionality during route guidance.
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Guidance Mode: Sets whether to display only the map screen or a split map-
guidance screen. 2 Guidance Mode P. 65
Street Name Guidance (U.S. models): Sets whether to read out the street names during voice guidance.
2 Street Name Guidance P. 67
Non-map Screens: Sets whether the guidance screen interrupts the screen display.
2 Non-map Screens P. 68
Guidance Point: Sets whether to display the guidance information to the destination or the next waypoint.
2 Guidance Point P. 69
Estimated Time: Sets whether to display the remaining time or arrival time to the guidance point.
2 Estimated Time P. 70
uuGuidanceuGuidance Mode System
Setu p
1 Guidance Mode
The guidance mode can also be selected from the Map Menu.
2 Map Menu P. 161
Press the NAV button to switch between the map, next guidance direction, and a list of guidance directions.
Turn-by-Turn Directions The next guidance point appears on the multi- information display.
2 Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 11
You can turn this feature on or off using the multi- information display. See the Owners Manual for instructions.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 65
Guidance Mode H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Guidance u Guidance Mode
Select the display mode for the map and guidance screens. Rotate to select an option. Press
.
The following options are available: Map (factory default): Displays only the map screen. When you approach a
guidance point, the next guidance point appears.
Map screen
Near the next guidance point
Next Maneuver screen
Next guidance point
65Continued
66
uuGuidanceuGuidance Mode
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 66
Direction List: Displays the map and direction list simultaneously on the map screen. When you approach a guidance point, the next guidance point appears.
Next Maneuver: Displays the map and next guidance point simultaneously on the map screen.
Direction List screen
Guidance direction list
Near the next guidance point
Next Maneuver screen
Next guidance point
Next Maneuver screen
Next guidance point
Near the next guidance point
Next Maneuver screen
uuGuidanceuStreet Name Guidance System
Setu p
1 Street Name Guidance
This feature is only available when the system language is set to English.
This feature may not be available in non-English speaking areas.
This function is available on U.S. models only.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 67
Street Name Guidance H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Guidance u Street Name Guidance
The navigation system includes the street names during voice guidance (e.g., Turn right on Main Street).
Rotate to select an option. Press .
The following options are available: On (factory default): Voice guidance includes the street names. Off: Disables the feature.
67
68
uuGuidanceuNon-map Screens
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 68
Non-map Screens H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Guidance u Non-map Screens
The navigation system temporarily interrupts the screen display to view the guidance screen as you approach a guidance point.
Rotate to select an option. Press .
The following options are available: On: The guidance screen interrupts other mode screens (e.g., audio, phone, etc,
except the rear view camera mode). Off (factory default): Disables the feature.
uuGuidanceuGuidance Point System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 69
Guidance Point H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Guidance u Guidance Point
Set the guidance point to display on the map screen. Rotate to select an option. Press
.
The following options are available: Destination (factory default): Displays the remaining/arrival time and distance to
the destination. Next Point: Displays the remaining/arrival time and distance to the next
waypoint.
69
70
uuGuidanceuEstimated Time
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 70
Estimated Time H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Guidance u Estimated Time
Select the estimated time to display on the screen. Rotate to select an option. Press
.
The following options are available: Arrival: Displays the arrival time to the destination or the next waypoint. Remaining (factory default): Displays the remaining time to the destination or
the next waypoint.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 71
Map
Setu p
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map
Select the landmark icons to display on the map, change the orientation of the map, display your current location, and learn the meanings of the icons, colors, and symbols displayed on the map.
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Show Icon on Map: Selects the icons to display on the map.
2 Showing Icons on Map P. 73
Color (Day): Selects the color of the map for the Day mode. 2 Color P. 75
Color (Night): Selects the color of the map for the Night mode. 2 Color P. 75
View: Selects the map orientation (North-up, Heading-up, or 3D map). 2 View (Map Orientation) P. 78
3D Angle Adjustment: Adjusts the viewing angle for the 3D map. 2 3D Angle Adjustment P. 79
Straight Line Guide: Sets whether to display a straight guideline to the destination or waypoint.
2 Straight Line Guide P. 80
71Continued
72
uuMapu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 72
Current Location: Displays and saves your current location. 2 Current Location P. 81
Map Legend: Displays an overview of the map features. 2 Map Legend P. 82
Display Tracking: Sets whether to display the tracking dots on the map. 2 Display Tracking P. 86
Delete Tracking: Deletes the tracking dots on the map. 2 Deleting Tracking Dots P. 87
Correct Vehicle Position: Adjusts the position of the vehicle on the map. 2 Correct Vehicle Position P. 88
System Device Information: Views database, software, device, and vehicle identification information.
2 System Device Information P. 351
Map Data Update: Checks the map data update status when updating the map database.
2 Map Data Update P. 351
uuMapuShowing Icons on Map System
Setu p
1 Showing Icons on Map
If you have PIN-protected your address book, enter your PIN when prompted. Move to select OK. PINs are optional.
2 PIN Numbers P. 49
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 73
Showing Icons on Map H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Show Icon on Map
Select the icons that are displayed on the map. 1. Rotate to select an item. Press
.
2. Rotate to select an option. Press . u Repeat step 1 and 2 as
necessary. 3. Move to select OK. Press .
The following options are available: All On: Displays the landmark icons.
2 Map Screen Legend P. 9
Customize: Fine-tunes the icon display. 2 Fine-tuning the Icons P. 74
Off: Hides the landmark icons.
73Continued
74
uuMapuShowing Icons on Map
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 74
Icons in some categories can be fine-tuned to display or hide. 1. Rotate to select the icons to
display on the map. Press . u Pressing toggles the icon
display on or off. u Repeat the procedure as
necessary.
2. Move and rotate to select OK. Press .
Fine-tuning the Icons
uuMapuColor System
Setu p
1 Color (Day)
The factory default is set to Beige.
1 Color (Night)
The factory default is set to Blue.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 75
Color Set separate map colors for Day and Night modes.
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Color (Day)
Rotate to select a color for the Day mode. Press .
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Color (Night)
Rotate to select a color for the Night mode. Press .
Color (Day)
Color (Night)
75Continued
uuMapuColor
76
System Setu
p
1 Switching Display Mode Manually
A visual guide helps you see the difference between Day and Night modes.
2 Day or Night Mode P. 11
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 76
Set the screen brightness separately for Day and Night modes. Press the (Display Mode) button to cycle through the display modes (Day to Night to Off).
1. Press the (Display Mode) button. u The Brightness bar is displayed
for a few seconds. u Rotate to adjust the
brightness. Press . 2. Press the (Display Mode)
button again. u Repeat the procedure to switch
the display modes.
Switching Display Mode Manually
Illumination Priority Operation
(Display Mode) button
1 Selects Day, Night, or Off display mode. This button has the highest priority and overrides all other display control adjustments listed below. Remember: Once you press this button, you assume full manual control of the display mode until the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Sunlight sensor (see your Owners Manual for location)
2 If the sunlight sensor detects daylight and the headlights are turned on, the system automatically overrides the Night display and displays the Day display mode. Remember: If desired, use the (Display Mode) button to override this automatic choice.
uuMapuColor System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 77
Dash illumination adjustment buttons (see your Owners Manual for location)
3 When headlights are turned on, and you wish to have the Day display mode, adjust the illumination to the full brightness setting (beeps). Remember: Adjust the dash brightness back to mid-range to allow auto switching by sensing if the headlights are on or off.
Headlights (Auto/ On/Off)
4 When turned on, the display changes to Night display mode. The previous three controls listed above can cancel this function. Remember: Use the (Display Mode) button, to adjust the dash illumination to full brightness, or set the display to your desired choice.
Screen color choice N/A The user can select the color of the screen that will be displayed for the Day and Night display modes described above.
Illumination Priority Operation
77
78
uuMapuView (Map Orientation)
System Setu
p
1 View (Map Orientation)
The red arrow in the symbol always points North.
Heading-up and 3D map view switch to the North-up view on 2 miles (3.2 km) or wider map scale.
The birds eye view map switches to the Heading-up map while scrolling the map.
The viewing angle for the birds eye view can be adjusted.
2 3D Angle Adjustment P. 79
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 78
View (Map Orientation) H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u View
Select the map orientation. Rotate to select an option. Press
.
The following options are available: North-up: Displays the map with North always pointing up. Heading-up: Displays the map so that the direction you are traveling is always
pointing up. 3D Map: Displays the birds eye view map.
uuMapu3D Angle Adjustment System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 79
3D Angle Adjustment H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u 3D Angle Adjustment
Adjust the viewing angle. Rotate to adjust the angle. Press
.
79
80
uuMapuStraight Line Guide
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 80
Straight Line Guide H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Straight Line Guide
Set whether to display a straight guideline to the destination or waypoint. Rotate to select an option. Press
.
The following options are available: On (factory default): Displays the straight guideline on the map. Off: Disables the feature.
uuMapuCurrent Location System
Setu p
1 Current Location
If you have PIN-protected your address book, enter your PIN when prompted. Press to select OK. PINs are optional.
2 PIN Numbers P. 49
The elevation is not displayed if the system is receiving insufficient GPS information. When elevation is displayed, it may differ with roadside elevation signs by 100 ft (30 m) or more.
Saving your current location does not change or cancel your current route.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 81
Current Location H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Current Location
Display and save your current location for future use as a destination. The address, latitude, longitude, and elevation of your current location are displayed.
To save your current location in the address book: 1. Press to select Address Book.
u Move to scroll the map as necessary.
2. Edit the name, phone number, and category.
2 Address Book P. 41
3. Move and rotate to select OK. Press .
81
82
uuMapuMap Legend
System Setu
p
1 Map Legend
A visual guide helps you see the map legend. 2 Map Screen Legend P. 9 2 Traffic ReroutingTM P. 165
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 82
Map Legend H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Map Legend
See an overview of the map lines, areas, routes, traffic information, and navigation icons.
Move or to select an item. u The system displays the map
legend.
uuMapuMap Legend System
Setu p
1 Map Scale and Functions
You can change between mile or km. 2 Unit Settings P. 35
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 83
The functions that are available from the map screen depend on the map scale.
Map Scale and Functions
Function page
Map Scale (top: mile, bottom: metric)
1/20 1/8 1/4 1/2 1 2 5 15 50 150 350 1000
80 200 400 800 1.6 3.2 8 24 80 240 560 1600
Icon display
Landmark icon 9
Exit info. 9
One-way traffic
9
Waypoint flag
11
Traffic incident 10
Map orientation
Heading-up 78
North-up 78
3D map 78
Others
Tracking dots 158
Unverified road 9
Map features 9
Avoid areas 62
Traffic speed 10
Continued 83
uuMapuMap Legend
84
System Setu
p
1 Map Icons and Functions
Icon display control Icons that can be displayed or hidden using the Interface Dial or voice command.
Icon selectable Icons that can be selected as a destination using the Interface Dial.
Icon searchable Icons that can be searched using the Find Nearest voice command.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 84
Display or hide all icons on the map screen, with the exception of Honda/Acura Dealer icons which are always shown.
Landmark icon
Map Icons and Functions
Type Icon display
control Icon selectable Icon searchable
Honda/Acura dealer Always on Yes Yes
Hospital Yes Yes Yes
School Yes Yes Yes
ATM Yes Yes Yes
Gas station Yes Yes Yes
Restaurants Yes Yes Yes
Post office Yes Yes Yes
Grocery store Yes Yes Yes
Hotel/Lodging Yes Yes Yes
Police station No icon No Yes
Shopping, Tourist attraction, Bank
No icon No Yes
Parking garage Yes Yes Yes
Parking lot Yes Yes Yes
Freeway/Highway exit info.
Yes Yes N/A
uuMapuMap Legend System
Setu p
1 Traffic icon
When you use the Interface Dial to position the cursor (round red circle) over the traffic incident icon, you can view the summary of the incident.
Press on the traffic incident icon to view a pop-up message describing the incident in detail.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 85
Traffic icon
Type Icon display
control Icon selectable Icon searchable
Traffic incident Yes No N/A
85
86
uuMapuDisplay Tracking
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 86
Display Tracking H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Display Tracking
The navigation system can be set to display white tracking dots (breadcrumbs) on the map screen.
Rotate to select an option. Press .
The following options are available: On: The system displays the white tracking dots.
2 Tracking Dots P. 158
Off (factory default): Disables the feature.
uuMapuDisplay Tracking System
Setu p
1 Deleting Tracking Dots
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, delete the tracking dots.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 87
H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Delete Tracking
Rotate to select Yes. Press .
Deleting Tracking Dots
87
88
uuMapuCorrect Vehicle Position
System Setu
p
1 Correct Vehicle Position
An apparent position error can occur where buildings, tunnels, and other objects block or reflect the GPS signals, forcing the system to use dead reckoning to determine your location and direction.
Using this function to adjust the vehicle position is not recommended. When the system reacquires a GPS signal, it will automatically place the vehicle in the correct location.
If you continually have to adjust the vehicle position, you may have problems with GPS reception or there may be database errors.
2 System Limitations P. 402
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 88
Correct Vehicle Position H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Correct Vehicle Position
Manually adjust the current position of the vehicle as displayed on the map screen if the position appears to be incorrect.
1. Put the vehicle in Park. 2. Rotate to select Correct
Vehicle Position. Press . 3. Scroll the map to position the
cursor over at your correct position. Press .
4. Rotate to position the arrowhead in the correct direction the vehicle is facing.
5. Press to select OK.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Setu p
Changing the Screen Settings Adjusts the screen settings of the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
1. Select More. 2. Select Screen Settings. 3. Use , or other icons to
adjust the setting. u Use the / icons to turn
the page. u Select to go back to the
previous screen.
The followings are adjustable screen settings: Sync Display Brightness: Selects whether the screen brightness synchronizes
with the instrument panel brightness. Brightness: Adjusts the screen's brightness. Contrast: Adjusts the screen's contrast. Black Level: Adjusts the screen's black level. Display: Changes between the daytime or nighttime modes. Beep: Turns on or off the beep that sounds every time you touch the screen. Keyboard: Changes the on-screen keyboard from the alphabetical order to the
qwerty type. Vibration: Turns on or off the vibration when you touch the screen. Fade Timer: Sets the screen black out timing.
89
90
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 90
Customized Features
1 Customized Features
When you customize settings, make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop and select the gear position to .
To customize other features, rotate , move , , or , and press . 2 List of customizable options P. 100
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
How to customize Select your desired setting item by pressing the SETTINGS button, then rotating while the power mode is ON and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Press .
SETTINGS Button
Audio/Information Screen
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 91
Customization flow
Press the SETTINGS button.
Guidance Volume
Brightness Contrast
Black Level
Bluetooth Status Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Default
Display
Bluetooth
Voice Reco
Sync Display Brightness
Clock
Clock Adjustment Clock Format
Clock Wallpaper
Clock/Wallpaper Type
Guidance Volume Sound/ Beep
Verbal Reminder
Song By Voice Song By Voice Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Auto Time Zone Auto Daylight
Clock Reset
Voice Prompt
System Settings
OK
91Continued
92
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
Trip A Reset Timing Trip B Reset Timing
Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Forward Collision Warning Distance ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Turn by Turn Display
Blind Spot Info Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
ACC Display Speed Unit
Memory Position Link
Factory Data Reset
Background Color Header Clock Display
Units
Operation Restriction Tips*
Language
System Device Information
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Reverse Alert Tone
Easy Entry/Exit
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 92
Default
Vehicle Settings
Driver Assist
System Setup
Driving Position Setup
Meter Setup
Others
OK
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
Maintenance Resetnfo.
Key And Remote Unlock Mode Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock
Keyless Open Mode Power Open By Outer Handle
Interior Light Dimming Time Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Keyless Access Beep Volume*
Keyless Access Light Flash Keyless Access Beep
Remote Start System On/Off
Auto Folding Door Mirror
Preferred Dynamic ModeSetup
Walk Away Auto Lock
Door Unlock Mode
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 93
Maintenance I
Door Setup
Power Tailgate Setup
Lighting
Setup
Keyless Access Setup
Dynamic Mode
93Continued * Not available on all models
94
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
Unverified Routing Traffic Rerouting
Edit POI Search Radius Along Route Avoided Area
Freeways Toll Roads ETC Roads
Route
reference
Ferries U-Turn
Server Route*
Guidance Mode Street Name Guidance*
Non-map Screens Guidance Point Estimated Time
Address Book Edit Go Home PIN Number
Previous Destination
Download POI Category History
Optimal Routes*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 94
Routing
P
Guidance
Personal
Info
Navi
Settings
Default
OK
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
Show Icon on Map Color (Day)
Color (Night) View
3D Angle Adjustment Straight Line Guide
Current Location Map Legend
Display Tracking Delete Tracking
Correct Vehicle Position System Device Information
Map Data Update
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 95
Map
95Continued
96
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline
uidelines
eferences
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Automatically Show Camera After Reverse Default Camera Mode
in Forward Default Camera Mode
in Reverse Show Camera When
Decelerating Clear Parking Guidance
Automatically Display
Cross Traffic Monitor
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 96
Rear
Camera*
Default
Camera Settings
OK
G Surround
View Camera*
Pr
Default
OK
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
Notification Beep
Favorite Teams
SportsFlashTM*1
Play Song from Beginning*1
Traffic & Weather Now Setup*1
Channel Art
Recording from CD Recording Quality*1
HDD Info Update Gracenote Album Info
Delete All HDD Data*1
Bluetooth Device List*1
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device*1
Source Select Popup HD Radio Mode*1
Cover Art
DVD Auto Play*1
Audio Language*1
Subtitle Language*1
Menu Language*1
Dynamic Range*1
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 97
Default
May change depending on your currently selected source.
*1:
Audio Settings
SXM
CD/HDD
Other
Bluetooth
DVD*
OK
97Continued * Not available on all models
98
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
Info Screen Preference
Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
AcuraLink Msg Notice
Auto Time Zone Auto Daylight
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert
Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect
Connect Phone
Edit Speed Dial Auto Transfer Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Use Contact Photo Automatic Phone Sync
Bluetooth Device List
Delete AcuraLink Message AcuraLink Subscription Status
Clock Reset
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 98
Clock Default
Other
Info Settings
AcuraLink
Default
Text/Email
Default
Phone
Default
Phone Settings
OK
OK
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
Source Select Popup Rear Control Rear Speaker
ingle/Dual Screen Mode
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 99
Default
Rear Ent Settings*
S
OK
99Continued * Not available on all models
100
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 100
List of customizable options
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Display
Sync Display Brightness Selects whether the display brightness synchronizes with the instrument panel brightness.
On*1/Off
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen.
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen.
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/information screen.
Sound/ Beep
Guidance Volume Changes the volume of the audio speakers.
Verbal Reminder Turns the verbal reminders on and off. On*1/Off
Voice Reco
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off
Song By Voice Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off. 2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 246
On*1/Off
Song By Voice Phonetic Modification
Modifies a voice command for music stored in the HDD or an iPod.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 248
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook. 2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 282
Guidance Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt.
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 101
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Bluetooth
Bluetooth Status Turns the Bluetooth on and off. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone, and creates a security PIN.
2 Pairing a Phone P. 269
Edit Pairing Code Changes a pairing code. 2 Changing the Pairing Code P. 272
Random/Fixed*1
101Continued
102
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 102
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper Type
Clock Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital*1/Small Digital/Off
Wallpaper
Changes the wallpaper type. Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Settings P. 32
Blank/Galaxy*1/ Metallic/Add New
Clock Adjustment Adjusts Clock. 2 Clock Adjustment P. 30
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. 12H*1/24H
Auto Time Zone Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones.
On*1/Off
Auto Daylight Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust the clock (spring ahead or fall back by one hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.
On*1/Off
Clock Reset Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group.
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 103
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System Settings
Others
Units Changes the distance unit on the navigation map screen.
mile*1/km (U.S.) mile/km*1 (Canada)
Language Changes the display language. English*1/Franais/ Espaol
Operation Restriction Tips*
Alerts you when manual control of the system is disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only voice commands are available.
On*1/Off
Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen and the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
Blue*1/Amber/Red/ Green
Header Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off
System Device Information Displays the system/device information.
Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 123
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System Settings group as default.
Default/OK
103Continued * Not available on all models
104
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 104
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Driver Assist System Setup
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Changes at which distance CMBSTM alerts. See the owners manual.
Long/Normal*1/Short
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle or when the vehicle goes out of the ACC with LSF range. See the owners manual.
On/Off*1
ACC Display Speed Unit Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multi- information display. See the owners manual.
mph*1/km/h (U.S.) mph/km/h*1 (Canada)
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system. See the owners manual.
Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. See the owners manual.
On/Off*1
Blind Spot Info Changes the setting for the blind spot information. See the owners manual.
Audible And Visual Alert*1/Visual Alert/ Off
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 105
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Meter Setup
Language Selection Changes the displayed language on the multi- information display. See the owners manual.
English*1/Franais/ Espaol
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees. See the owners manual.
-5F ~ 0F*1 ~ +5F (U.S.) -3C ~ 0C*1 ~ +3C (Canada)
Trip A Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A. See the owners manual.
When Refueled/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1
Trip B Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B. See the owners manual.
When Refueled/IGN Off/Manually Reset*1
Reverse Alert Tone Turns the audible notification on and off when you set the gear position to . See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
Turn by Turn Display Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance. See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
105Continued
106
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 106
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Driving Position Setup
Memory Position Link Turns the driving position memory system on and off using a remote transmitter. See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
Easy Entry/Exit
Moves the seat rearward and steering wheel fully up when you get in/get out of the vehicle. Changes the setting for this feature. See the owners manual.
Seat & Steering Wheel*1/Seat Only/ Steering Wheel Only/ Off
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 107
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Keyless Access Setup
Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the drivers door handle. See the owners manual.
Drivers Door or Tailgate Only*1/All Doors
Keyless Access Beep Volume* Changes the volume of the keyless access beep. See the owners manual.
High*1/Low
Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors. See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
Remote Start System On/Off Turns the remote engine start feature on and off. See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
Walk Away Auto Lock Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle. See the owners manual.
On/Off*1
107Continued * Not available on all models
108
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 108
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Lighting Setup
Interior Light Dimming Time Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. See the owners manual.
60seconds/ 30seconds*1/ 15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door. See the owners manual.
60seconds/30seconds/ 15seconds*1/0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. See the owners manual.
Max/High/Mid*1/Low/ Min
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 109
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Door Setup
Auto Door Lock Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature. See the owners manual.
With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically. See the owners manual.
All Doors When Drivers Door Opens*1/ All Doors When Shifted to Park/All Doors When Ignition Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Sets up either the drivers door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote or built-in key. See the owners manual.
Driver Door*1/All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door. See the owners manual.
90seconds/60seconds/ 30seconds*1
Auto Folding Door Mirror Changes how you can fold the door mirrors. See the owners manual.
Auto Fold With Keyless*1/Manual Only
109Continued
110
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 110
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Vehicle Settings
Power Tailgate Setup
Keyless Open Mode Changes the keyless setting for when the power tailgate opens. See the owners manual.
Anytime*1/When Unlocked
Power Open By Outer Handle
Selects whether to enable the power tailgate open operation using the tailgate outer handle. See the owners manual.
Off (Manual Only)/On (Power/Manual)*1
Dynamic Mode Setup
Preferred Dynamic Mode Changes the dynamic mode setting for when you set the power mode to ON. See the owners manual.
Last Used*1/Comfort/ Normal/Sport
Maintenance Info.
Maintenance Reset Resets the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service. See the owners manual.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Vehicle Settings group as default.
Default/OK
Navi Settings
Personal Info
Address Book Stores new addresses or edits your address book.
Edit Go Home Sets or edits your home address.
PIN Number Sets or changes your PIN.
Previous Destination Deletes the destination history.
Category History Deletes the place categories you recently used.
Download POI Edits and deletes the Imported POI categories.
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 111
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Navi Settings
Routing
Route Preference
Freeways
Change the route preference by selecting minimum or maximum driving methods.
Max*1/Min
Toll Roads Max*1/Min
ETC Roads Max/Min*1
Ferries Max*1/Min
U-Turn Max/Min*1
Server Route* View three routes distributed from AcuraLink. On/Off*1
Optimal Routes*
You can select desired routes by sorting the route list.
2 Optimal Routes* P. 57
Unverified Routing Sets whether you use the route guidance in unverified areas.
On*1/Off
Traffic Rerouting Sets whether you use automatic recalculation based on traffic information.
On/Off*1
Edit POI Search Radius Along Route
On Freeways
Sets the distance from the route to find waypoints.
mile: 1, 2*1, 5, 10mi km: 1.6, 3*1, 8, 16km
On Surface Streets
mile: 1/2*1, 1, 2, 5mi km: 0.8*1, 1.6, 3, 8km
Avoided Area Specifies areas to avoid when calculating a route.
111Continued * Not available on all models
112
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 112
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Navi Settings
Guidance
Guidance Mode Sets whether to display only the map screen or a split map guidance screen.
Map*1/Direction List/ Next Maneuver
Street Name Guidance Sets whether to read out the street names during voice guidance (U.S. models).
On*1/Off
Non-map Screens Sets whether the guidance screen interrupts the screen display.
On/Off*1
Guidance Point Sets whether to display the guidance information to the destination or the next waypoint.
Destination*1/Next Point
Estimated Time Sets whether to display the remaining time or arrival time to the guidance point.
Arrival/Remaining*1
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 113
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Navi Settings
Map
Show Icon on Map Selects the icons to display on the map.
Color (Day) Selects the color of the map for the Day mode. White/Beige*1/Blue/ Black
Color (Night) Selects the color of the map for the Night mode. White/Beige/Blue*1/ Black
View Selects the map orientation. North-up*1/Heading- up/3D Map
3D Angle Adjustment Adjusts the viewing angle for the 3D map.
Straight Line Guide Sets whether to display a straight guideline to the destination or waypoint.
On*1/Off
Current Location Displays and saves your current location.
Map Legend Displays an overview of the map features.
Display Tracking Sets whether to display the tracking dots on the map.
On/Off*1
Delete Tracking Deletes the tracking dots on the map.
Correct Vehicle Position Adjusts the position of the vehicle on the map.
System Device Information Views database, software, device, and vehicle identification information.
Map Data Update Checks the map data update status when updating the map database.
113Continued
114
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 114
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera Settings
Rear Camera*
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera group as default.
Default/OK
Surround View Camera*
Guidelines Fixed Guideline Sets whether to turn on the reference line display. On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Sets whether to turn on the projection line display. On*1/Off
Preferences
Automatically Show Camera After Reverse
Sets the rear view to be automatically switched to the front view when the gear position is out of .
On/Off*1
Default Camera Mode in Forward
Selects which screen to display when the surround view camera system is turned on while the vehicle is moving forward.
Front Ground View*1/ Last Used/Front Blind View/Side View
Default Camera Mode in Reverse
Sets which screen to display when the surround view camera system is turned on while the vehicle is reversing.
Rear Ground View*1/ Last Used/Rear View/ Rear Wide View
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 115
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera Settings
Surround View Camera*
Preferences
Show Camera When Decelerating
Sets the screen to automatically return to the camera view at vehicle speeds of 7 mph (12 km/h) or lower. The screen can return only when the display has been switched to the audio/ information screen at the vehicle speed of over 9 mph (15 km/h).
On/Off*1
Clear Parking Guidance Automatically
Turns the parking guide lines on and off. On*1/Off
Display Adjusts the screens preferences.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Surround View Camera group as default.
Default/OK
Cross Traffic Monitor
Turns the cross traffic monitor feature on and off. See the owners manual.
On*1/Off
115Continued * Not available on all models
116
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 116
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio Settings
SXM
SportsFlashTM
Notification Turns on and off the sports alert function. Disable*1/Enable/ Enable(one time)
Beep Causes the system to beep when the sports alert is notified.
On*1/Off
Favorite Teams Selects your favorite sport teams.
Play Song from Beginning Turns on and off the Tune Start function. On*1/Off
Traffic & Weather Now Setup
Selects the location to display the SiriusXM traffic and weather information.
Channel Art Turns on and off the channel art display. On/Off*1
CD/HDD
Recording from CD Selects whether the songs on music CDs are automatically recorded to the HDD.
Auto*1/Manual
Recording Quality Selects the quality of the music files recorded to the HDD.
Standard*1/High
HDD Info Displays the HDD capacity.
Update Gracenote Album Info
Updates the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) from CD or from USB.
Update by CD*1/ Update by USB
Delete All HDD Data 2 Deleting All HDD Data P. 238
SiriusXM mode
CD mode
CD mode
HDD mode
CD or HDD mode
HDD mode
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 117
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio Settings
Bluetooth Bluetooth Device List
Edits or deletes a Bluetooth Audio device paired to HFL.
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Connects, disconnects, or pairs a Bluetooth Audio device to HFL.
DVD*
DVD Auto Play Turns the auto play feature on or off. On*1/Off
Audio Language Selects a language for the audio that is available on the DVD.
Subtitle Language Selects a language for the subtitle that is available on the DVD.
Menu Language Selects a language for the DVD menu that is available on the DVD.
Dynamic Range Sets whether to control the range of the loud and low sounds.
On*1/Off
Bluetooth Audio, Pandora* or AhaTM mode
Bluetooth Audio, Pandora* or AhaTM mode
DVD mode
117Continued * Not available on all models
118
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 118
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio Settings
Other
Source Select Popup Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources comes on when the AUDIO button is pressed.
On/Off*1
HD Radio Mode*
Selects whether the audio system automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analogue waves only.
Auto*1/Analog
Cover Art Turns on and off the cover art display. On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio Settings group as default. Default/OK
FM/AM mode
iPod, USB, Pandora* or AhaTM mode
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 119
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone Settings
Phone
Connect Phone Pairs a new phone to HFL, or connects or disconnects a paired phone.
2 Pairing a Phone P. 269
Bluetooth Device List Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
2 Phone Settings P. 287
Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds, or deletes a speed dial entry. 2 Setting Up Speed Dialing P. 276
Auto Transfer Sets calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Auto Answer Sets whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four seconds.
On/Off*1
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1/ Off
Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
Use Contact Photo Displays a callers picture on an incoming call screen.
On*1/Off
119Continued
120
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 120
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone Settings
Text/ Email
Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and off. On*1/Off
Select Account Selects a text or e-mail message account.
New Text/Email Alert Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Default/OK
uuCustomized Featuresu System
Setu p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 121
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Info Settings
Acura Link
AcuraLink Msg Notice Selects whether newly received AcuraLink messages are to be displayed.
On*1/Off
Delete AcuraLink Message Deletes AcuraLink messages.
AcuraLink Subscription Status
Displays your current AcuraLink subscription status.
Clock
Clock/ Wallpaper Type
Clock
See System Settings on P. 100 to P. 103.
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone
Auto Daylight
Clock Reset
Other Info Screen Preference
Selects the top menu when the INFO button is pressed. Info Top- A brief menu pops up. Info Menu- A full menu pops up. Off- A menu does not pop up.
Info Top/Info Menu*1/ Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info Settings group as default.
Default/OK
121Continued
122
uuCustomized Featuresu
System Setu
p
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 122
*1: Default Setting
Setup Group
Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Rear Ent Settings*
Source Select Popup Select weather the list of selectable audio sources comes on when the REAR AUDIO button is pressed.
On/Off*1
Rear Control Select weather to use the rear control panel to control the RES.
On*1/Off
Rear Speaker
Sets the front audio source to play through the rear speakers, even when the RES is on. The RES source can only be heard through the wireless headphones.
On*1/Off
Single/Dual Screen Mode
Selects a source to continue playing when you switch from dual mode to single mode on the overhead screen. Rotate to select a source and press .
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Ent Settings group as default.
* Not available on all models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 123
Data Reset
Setu p
1 Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset: Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
Route Preference Audio preset settings Phonebook entries Other display items and each item settings.
Defaulting All the Settings H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Others u Factory Data Reset
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1. Rotate to select Yes. Press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
2. Rotate to select Yes. Press again to reset the settings. u The confirmation message will
appear. Press to select OK.
123
124
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 124
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 125
Navigation
This section describes how to enter a destination, select a route to take, and follow the
route to your destination. It also describes how to change your route or destination along
the way.
25
Entering a Destination ......................... 126 Address ............................................... 128 Address Book....................................... 135 Previous Destination............................. 136 Place Category ..................................... 137 Local Search......................................... 139 Place Name.......................................... 141 Place Phone Number ............................ 144 Download POI...................................... 145 Scenic Route ........................................ 146 Intersection.......................................... 147 Map Input............................................ 148 Coordinate .......................................... 150
Calculating the Route ............................151 Viewing the Routes ...............................153
Driving to Your Destination .................154 Viewing the Route ................................154 Listening to Voice Guidance ..................159 Reaching a Waypoint ............................160
Map Menu ..............................................161 Displaying the Map Menu .....................161 Hide Traffic Flow...................................163 Directions .............................................163 Traffic ReroutingTM ................................165
Changing Your Route ............................168 Pausing the Route.................................169 Canceling the Route .............................169
1
Adding Waypoints ............................... 170 Editing the Destination List ................... 174 Taking a Detour ................................... 176 Avoiding Streets ................................... 176
Changing Your Destination ................. 177 Find Nearest Place ................................ 177 Selecting a Destination on the Map...... 178 Entering a New Destination.................. 179
Resuming Your Trip .............................. 180
126
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 126
Entering a Destination
1 Entering a Destination
If you press the MENU button when en route, the Route Option screen is displayed.
2 Changing Your Route P. 168
Prior to departure, you can set areas along your route to avoid.
2 Avoided Area P. 62
H MENU button (on map)
This section describes how to enter a destination for route guidance. Rotate to select an item. Press
. u Select More Search Methods to
display additional menu entries.
The following items are available: Address: Sets a destination by entering an address.
2 Address P. 128
Address Book: Sets a destination by selecting an address stored in your Address Book.
2 Address Book P. 135
Previous Destination: Sets a destination by selecting a previous destination. 2 Previous Destination P. 136
uuEntering a Destinationu N
avig atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 127
Go Home: Sets your home address as a destination. 2 Going Home P. 12
Place Category: Sets a destination by selecting a place/landmark. 2 Place Category P. 137
Local Search: Sets a destination by using Local Search. 2 Local Search P. 139
Place Name: Sets a destination by entering a place name. 2 Place Name P. 141
Place Phone Number: Sets a destination by entering the phone number of a place/landmark.
2 Place Phone Number P. 144
Download POI: Sets a destination by using a list of the imported POI (category and places) data you created.
2 Download POI P. 145
Scenic Route: Sets a destination by using a list of scenic roads for each state or province (U.S. and Canada only).
2 Scenic Route P. 146
Intersection: Sets a destination (intersection) by entering two streets. 2 Intersection P. 147
Map Input: Sets a destination by scrolling through the map. 2 Map Input P. 148
Coordinate: Sets a destination by entering latitude and longitude. 2 Coordinate P. 150
127
128
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 128
Address H MENU button u Address
Enter an address to use as the destination. The state or province you are currently in is displayed (e.g., California).
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: City: Selects your destination city.
2 Selecting a City P. 131
Street: Selects your destination street. 2 Selecting a Street P. 132
House Number: Enters the house number to select the street. 2 Selecting a Street by House Number P. 134
ZIP Code (U.S.)/Postal Code (Canada): Enters the zip code or postal code to select the city.
2 Selecting a City by Zip Code or Postal Code P. 130
Change State (U.S.)/Change Province (Canada): Selects the state or province. 2 Selecting the State or Province P. 129
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress N
avig atio
n
1 Selecting the State or Province
Move or to select the following areas: USA for the U.S. mainland, Alaska, Hawaii, and
Puerto Rico Canada Mexico
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 129
H MENU button u Address u Change State/Change Province
Rotate to select a state or province from the list. Press .
Selecting the State or Province
Continued 129
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress
130
N avig
atio n
1 Selecting a City by Zip Code or Postal Code
If your city is not listed, it may be part of a larger metropolitan area. Try entering the street first.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 130
H MENU button u Address u ZIP Code/Postal Code
1. Enter the zip code or postal code of your destination.
2. Move to select OK. Press .
3. Rotate to select the destination city from the list. Press
. u Next, you are prompted to
enter a street name. 2 Selecting a Street P. 132
Selecting a City by Zip Code or Postal Code
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress N
avig atio
n
1 Selecting a City
Vehicle position may not be displayed when: The automobile is traveling off-road. The vehicle position data cannot be updated. You do not need to enter spaces or symbols (e.g., &, -, %). Partial matches are supported (e.g., ANGELES to find LOS ANGELES).
If your city is not listed, it may be part of a larger metropolitan area. Try entering the street first.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 131
H MENU button u Address u City
The name of the city where you are currently located is displayed. 1. Enter the name of a different city,
or move to select OK for the current city. Press .
2. Rotate to select your destination city from the list. Press
. u A list of matching hits is
automatically displayed after you enter several letters, with the closest match at the top of the list. Matching letters are highlighted.
u Next, you are prompted to enter a street name. 2 Selecting a Street P. 132
Selecting a City
Non-detailed area mark: Try entering the street first and then select the city.
Continued 131
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress
132
N avig
atio n
1 Selecting a Street
When entering the names of major freeways/ highways, you can use the following abbreviations. For interstates, use an I (e.g., I-10). For U.S. freeways, use US (e.g., US-18). For state freeways, use the two-character state designation (e.g., CA- 101). For county roads, use the appropriate designation (e.g., G-2). For Trans-Canada and Provincial highways, use Hwy (HWY-7). For County roads, use CR (CR- 32). For Regional Roads, use RR (RR-5).
If you did not select a city first and there is more than one city with the specified street, a list of cities is displayed.
Rotate to select the desired city from the list. Press .
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 132
H MENU button u Address u Street
1. Enter the name of your destination street. u Do not enter the street type
(e.g., street, road, avenue) or direction (e.g., north, south, east, west).
u Move to select OK to display a list of streets. Press .
2. Rotate to select your destination street from the list. Press . u A list of matching hits is
automatically displayed after you enter several letters, with the closest match at the top of the list. Matching letters are highlighted.
Selecting a Street
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress N
avig atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 133
3. Enter the street number. u Only valid street numbers can
be entered. 4. Move to select OK. Press . 5. Set the route to your destination.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
133Continued
134
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 134
H MENU button u Address u House Number
1. Enter the house number. u Only a valid house number can
be entered. 2. Move to select OK. Press .
u If you did not yet select a street name, enter a street name when you are prompted.
3. Rotate to select your destination street from the list. Press . u Select a city when you are
prompted. 4. Set the route to your destination.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
Selecting a Street by House Number
uuEntering a DestinationuAddress Book N
avig atio
n
1 Address Book
If you have PIN-protected your address book, enter your PIN when prompted. Press to select OK. PINs are optional.
2 PIN Numbers P. 49
Move and rotate to select the following items: Add New Address: Adds an entry to the address
book. 2 Adding an Address Book Entry P. 42
Sort: Selects Sort by Name or Sort by Distance. Delete All: Deletes all entries in the address book. Driver 1 or Driver 2: Displays the address book for
the selected user.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 135
Address Book H MENU button u Address Book
Select an address stored in your address book to use as the destination. 1. Rotate to select your
destination from the list. Press . 2. Set the route to your destination.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
u Move or to display only the entries in the categories you have created. 2 Selecting an Address Book
Category P. 44
135
136
uuEntering a DestinationuPrevious Destination
N avig
atio n
1 Previous Destination
If Previous Destination is grayed out, there are no previous destinations entered.
Your home address and addresses stored in your address book are not added to the list of previous destinations.
Move and rotate to select Delete All to delete all previous destinations.
You can delete unwanted previous destinations from the list.
2 Previous Destination P. 50
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 136
Previous Destination H MENU button u Previous Destination
Select an address from a list of your 50 most recent destinations to use as the destination. The list is displayed with the most recent destination at the top.
1. Rotate to select a destination from the list. Press .
2. Set the route to your destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
uuEntering a DestinationuPlace Category N
avig atio
n
1 Place Category
This option is convenient if you do not know the exact name of a place or if you want to narrow down the number of matches returned for places with a common name.
Move to select Category History to access your recently used place categories. Up to 30 categories can be stored.
You can also delete your recently used place categories.
2 Category History P. 51
Search POI Categories helps you to search the subcategory. When you enter a keyword and select OK, the list of appropriate subcategories is displayed.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 137
Place Category H MENU button u Place Category
Select the category of a place (e.g., Banking, Lodging, Restaurant) stored in the map database to search for the destination.
1. Rotate to select a category. Press .
2. Rotate to select a subcategory. Press .
137Continued
uuEntering a DestinationuPlace Category
138
N avig
atio n
1 Place Category
The straight line distance (as the crow flies, not driving distance) and direction to the destination are shown for the highlighted place.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 138
3. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Search by Name: Searches for a place in the subcategory by name. Enter a place
name when prompted. Sort by Distance to Travel: Displays all the places in the subcategory sorted by
distance from your current location. The closest place is displayed at the top. City Vicinity: Searches for a place in the subcategory within a 20 mile (32 km)
radius of a specific city. Enter a city name when prompted and then select a city. Only the first 1000 matching places/landmarks are displayed.
4. Rotate to select a destination from the list. Press .
5. Set the route to your destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
uuEntering a DestinationuLocal Search N
avig atio
n
1 Local Search
When you select Search by keyword, the list of appropriate categories is displayed.
The screen in this section may differ from the actual ones.
Local Search is a subscription service. For more information, contact an Acura dealer or visit owners.acura.com (U.S.) or www.acura.ca/owners/ acuralink (Canada).
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 139
Local Search H MENU button u Local Search
Select a place via Local Search database as the destination. 1. Rotate to select a category
(e.g., Community). Press .
2. Rotate to select a subcategory. Press .
139Continued
140
uuEntering a DestinationuLocal Search
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 140
3. Rotate to select an item. Press .
4. Set the route to your destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
The following items are available: Search Nearby: Finds the nearest POI around your vehicle. Search from Map: Selects a POI by scrolling the Interface Dial on the map
screen. Search from Destination: Selects a POI around the destination. Search the
category by scrolling the Interface Dial.
uuEntering a DestinationuPlace Name N
avig atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 141
Place Name H MENU button u Place Name
Enter the name of a place (e.g., business, hotel, restaurant) stored in the map database to use as the destination.
1. Enter a place name. 2. Move to select OK to display a
list of matching hits. Press .
3. Rotate to select a place name from the list. Press . u If the place name is in multiple
categories, the categories are displayed when you select it. 2 Place Name in Multiple
Categories P. 142
4. Set the route to your destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
141Continued
uuEntering a DestinationuPlace Name
142
N avig
atio n
1 Place Name in Multiple Categories
Matching letters are highlighted.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 142
If the place name is in multiple categories of the map database, the following screen is displayed.
1. Rotate to select a place name. Press .
2. Rotate to select a subcategory. Press .
Place Name in Multiple Categories
uuEntering a DestinationuPlace Name N
avig atio
n
1 Place Name in Multiple Categories
Move to select Sort by City or Sort by Distance.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 143
3. Rotate to select a place. Select and press .
4. Set the route to your destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
143
144
uuEntering a DestinationuPlace Phone Number
N avig
atio n
1 Place Phone Number
All 10 digits must be entered.
Phone numbers of private residences entered in your address book are not stored in the database and thus cannot be used to search for a destination.
A list is displayed if there are multiple locations in the database with the same phone number. Rotate to select a place from the list. Press .
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 144
Place Phone Number H MENU button u More Search Methods u Place Phone Number
Select a destination by phone number. Only phone numbers in the database are recognized.
1. Enter the area code and phone number.
2. Rotate to select OK. Press . 3. Set the route to your destination.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
uuEntering a DestinationuDownload POI N
avig atio
n
1 Download POI
Move and rotate to select the following items: Import from USB: Imports POI data into the
navigation system. 2 Importing POI Categories P. 52
Delete All: Deletes all POI entries. Help with Feature: Views tips for the Download
POI feature.
If you select From AcuraLink, you can download POI data stored on the AcuraLink server.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 145
Download POI H MENU button u More Search Methods u Download POI
Select a place imported into the navigation system as the destination. 1. Rotate to select a category
from the list. Press .
2. Rotate to select a place. Press .
3. Set the route to your destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
145
146
uuEntering a DestinationuScenic Route
N avig
atio n
1 Scenic Route
If you select a scenic road that runs through multiple states or provinces, only the portion of the road in the selected state or province is displayed.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 146
Scenic Route H MENU button u More Search Methods u Scenic Route
Select a scenic road as a destination (U.S. and Canada only). 1. Rotate to select a state/
province. Press .
2. Rotate to select a scenic road. Press .
3. Set the route to your destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
uuEntering a DestinationuIntersection N
avig atio
n
1 Intersection
It is usually easier to select Street to find the streets first. The city or cities that the streets are in will be displayed. If you select City and your city is not listed, it may be part of a larger metropolitan area. Try entering the street first.
If the intersection is outside the state or province you are currently in, rotate to select Change State/ Change Province.
2 Selecting the State or Province P. 129
If there is more than one intersection, you are prompted to select the intersection. If the two streets that you have selected do not intersect, no intersection is entered.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 147
Intersection H MENU button u More Search Methods u Intersection
Select the intersection of two streets as the destination. The state or province for your current location is displayed at the top of the screen (e.g., California).
1. Rotate to select the intersection search method. Press
. 2. Set the route to your destination.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
The following options are available: City: Selects the city where the intersection is located. You are prompted to enter
the name of the two intersecting streets. 2 Selecting a City P. 131
Street: Selects the two intersecting streets. The city or cities that the streets are located in are displayed.
2 Selecting a Street P. 132
Change State (U.S.)/Change Province (Canada): Selects the state or province. 2 Selecting the State or Province P. 129
147
148
uuEntering a DestinationuMap Input
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 148
Map Input H MENU button u More Search Methods u Map Input
Use the Interface Dial to manually select an icon or a location on the map screen as the destination. You are prompted to define the map area to display.
1. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Current Position: Your current location is centered on the map. State (U.S.)/Province (Canada): You are prompted to select the state or
province. 2 Selecting the State or Province P. 129
City: You are prompted to select the city. 2 Selecting a City P. 131
USA, Canada and Mexico: Your current location is displayed on a map of the country.
uuEntering a DestinationuMap Input N
avig atio
n
1 Map Input
Auto Zoom Press repeatedly on the map to zoom in (to the scale 1/4 mile (400 m)) while scrolling the map.
Information icons are displayed at scales from 1 mile to 1/4 mile (1.6 km to 400 m). Place/landmark icons are displayed at 1/8 mile (200 m) or less. Roads are displayed at 1/4 mile (400 m) or less.
If you select multiple icons within the cursor radius, you are prompted to select one of the items from a list.
2 Selecting a Destination on the Map P. 178
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 149
2. Scroll the map to position the cursor over your desired destination, adjusting the map scale as necessary. u If the address is not the desired
location, scroll the map to another location and try again.
3. Press to display the route calculation menu.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
4. Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press .
149
150
uuEntering a DestinationuCoordinate
N avig
atio n
1 Coordinate
Latitude and longitude must be entered up to the seconds value.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 150
Coordinate H MENU button u More Search Methods u Coordinate
Specify a location using latitude and longitude map coordinates. 1. Enter the latitude and select OK. 2. Enter the longitude and select OK.
3. Move to scroll the map to position the cursor over your desired destination, adjusting the map scale as necessary. u If the address is not the desired
location, scroll to another location and try again.
4. Press to display the route calculation menu.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
5. Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press .
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 151
Calculating the Route
avig atio
n
1 Calculating the Route
The straight line distance (as the crow flies, not driving distance) and direction to the destination are shown.
You cannot use voice commands while the system is calculating the route.
Search Nearby You can find the nearest place/landmark (e.g., nearest gas station) by specifying a category.
2 Find Nearest Place P. 177
Call You can place a telephone call to the destination phone number.
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 266
Save to Address Book You can add the destination address to the address book.
2 Adding an Address Book Entry P. 42
Edit/Delete Entry You can edit or delete the address book entry.
2 Editing an Address Book Entry P. 44 2 Deleting an Address Book Entry P. 45
This section describes how to calculate your route. 1. Rotate to select Set as
Destination. Press . u The system calculates and
displays the route line on the map screen.
2 Route Line P. 156
u Move to scroll the map around the destination.
The following options are available: View Routes: Displays three different routes.
2 Viewing the Routes P. 153
Route Preference: Move to select Route Preference to change the route preferences (calculating method).
2 Route Preference P. 56
151Continued
uuCalculating the Routeu
152
N avig
atio n
1 Calculating the Route
Edit Home Entry You can edit your home address entry.
2 Home Address P. 48
More Info You can view detailed information about the destination.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 152
2. Follow the route guidance to your destination.
2 Driving to Your Destination P. 154
u The system provides you with pop-up messages if your route passes through unverified areas, avoid areas, or areas with traffic restrictions.
uuCalculating the RouteuViewing the Routes N
avig atio
n
1 Viewing the Routes
It is not unusual for some calculated route options to be identical.
Server Routes is a subscription service. For more information, contact an Acura dealer or visit www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink.
Canadian models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 153
Viewing the Routes View three different routes to your destination.
Rotate to select a route. Press .
u The travel distance and estimated travel time is displayed for each route.
u The system calculates and displays the route line on the map screen.
2 Route Line P. 156
Using the server route*
The following items are available: Quick: Displays the route with the shortest travel time. Direct: Displays the route with the shortest travel distance. Eco: Displays the route with the best fuel efficiency.
153* Not available on all models
154
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 154
Driving to Your Destination
1 Viewing the Route
You can change the map scale by rotating .
If you scroll the map while en route, the time and distance to destination indicators are replaced with an indicator showing distance from the current vehicle position.
You can display only the map screen or a split map- guidance screen.
2 Guidance Mode P. 65
This section describes how to follow the route guidance to your destination, receive traffic information and choose the icons displayed on the map screen.
Viewing the Route
After calculating the route to your destination, the route is displayed on the map screen.
2 Map Screen Legend P. 9
As you drive, the system tracks your position on the map in real time and provides guidance as you approach each guidance point on the route.
2 During Route Guidance P. 11
Map Screen
uuDriving to Your DestinationuViewing the Route N
avig atio
n
1 Guidance Screen
A visual guide helps you check the guidance screen. 2 Guidance Screen P. 11
Turn-by-Turn Directions The next guidance point appears on the multi- information display.
2 Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 11
You can turn this feature on or off using the multi- information display. See the Owners Manual for instructions.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 155
The guidance screen offers an alternative way to view your route. u The next guidance point is
displayed as you approach each guidance point on the route.
u You can also view a list of guidance directions.
Guidance Screen
Continued 155
uuDriving to Your DestinationuViewing the Route
156
N avig
atio n
1 Route Line
You can set Unverified Routing to Off to follow your own route to the destination. If Unverified Routing is On, be aware that unverified streets may not be displayed accurately.
2 Unverified Routing P. 58
The route line may also consist of red, orange, or green segments when traffic information is displayed.
2 Traffic Information*/AcuraLink Real-Time Traffic* P. 10
2 Traffic ReroutingTM P. 165
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 156
When driving on verified streets, the route line is light blue. The route line display changes when driving on unverified streets:
If Unverified Routing is Off, the route line uses verified streets only (when possible). If Straight Line Guide is set to On, a pink vector line pointing directly towards your destination is displayed.
2 Straight Line Guide P. 80
If Unverified Routing is On, the route line changes to a blue-pink line to indicate that the route line uses unverified streets.
Route Line
Straight line guide
Blue-pink route line
* Not available on all models
uuDriving to Your DestinationuViewing the Route N
avig atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 157
If you leave the calculated route, the system automatically recalculates a route to the desired destination based on your current location and direction.
2 Route Preference P. 56
Deviating From the Planned Route
157Continued
uuDriving to Your DestinationuViewing the Route
158
N avig
atio n
1 Tracking Dots
A message Not on a digitized road may appear when you drive 1/2 mile (800 m) away from a mapped road.
Breadcrumbs may occasionally be displayed in urban areas, such as large parking lots in shopping malls, in new subdivisions where the roads are not yet in the database, or in areas where a GPS signal is unavailable, such as in a parking garage.
Breadcrumbs are limited to approximately 150 miles (240 km). Breadcrumbs at the beginning of the trail are deleted if you exceed that distance.
Breadcrumbs are displayed only at 1/20, 1/8, 1/4, and 1/2 mile (80, 200, 400, and 800 m) map scales.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 158
You can display a series of dots (breadcrumbs) to track the path you are taking. If needed, you can follow the dots back to the mapped road you originally left.
2 Display Tracking P. 86
Tracking Dots
uuDriving to Your DestinationuListening to Voice Guidance N
avig atio
n
1 Listening to Voice Guidance
You can turn voice guidance OFF if you prefer. On the map screen, press to display the Map Menu. Select Guidance Volume and adjust the volume level to 0. You can also adjust Guidance Volume by rotating the volume knob or using the VOL buttons on the steering wheel during route guidance or voice command confirmations.
When driving in unverified areas, the phrase if possible is inserted before each voice guidance prompt.
Voice in the Map Menu may be grayed out if: The system is in process of gathering the route
guidance information. The vehicle is out of the road (e.g., pulling in a
parking lot).
The timing of voice guidance varies depending on the type of road you are on and the distance to the next guidance point.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 159
Listening to Voice Guidance H ENTER button (on map) u Voice
As you approach each guidance point, a pop-up window is displayed on the map screen with instructions for you to follow. Voice guidance for each guidance point is also provided. Typically, you hear three prompts: 1/2 mile (800 m) from the guidance point (2 miles (3 km) on freeway/highway) 1/4 mile (400 m) from the guidance point (1 mile (1.5 km) on freeway/highway) Just before the guidance point To replay voice guidance, rotate to select Voice in the Map Menu. If you select Voice between guidance points, voice guidance for the next guidance point is provided.
159
160
uuDriving to Your DestinationuReaching a Waypoint
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 160
Reaching a Waypoint When you reach a waypoint, a pop-up message is displayed. You can continue or pause the route guidance.
Rotate to select No to pause the route guidance. Press . u Select Yes to continue the
guidance.
You can resume the route guidance in the following ways: Restart the engine when you stop your car (e.g., to rest, stop for gas, etc.).
2 Resuming Your Trip P. 180
Select Resume Guidance from the navigation menu or the map menu. 2 Map Menu P. 161 2 Changing Your Route P. 168
Resuming the Route Guidance
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 161
Map Menu
avig atio
n
1 Map Menu
If you scroll the map while en route, press the NAV (or BACK) button to return to the current position map screen, then press .
Displaying the Map Menu Use the Map Menu to control the icons displayed on the screen and to display traffic information and messages. You can also use the Map Menu to find locations or to cancel the route.
1. On the map screen, press . u The Map Menu is displayed on
the map screen.
2. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Voice: Select to hear the voice guidance when en route.
2 Listening to Voice Guidance P. 159
Guidance Volume: Adjusts the navigation system volume level. 2 Sound and Beep Settings P. 29
161Continued
uuMap MenuuDisplaying the Map Menu
162
N avig
atio n
1 Map Menu
Directions The system provides freeway/highway exit information only in the U.S.
Traffic Incidents You must be in or near a traffic-enabled city to receive coverage for that area. Traffic information is available in certain areas in the lower 48 states.
2 Traffic Information P. 406
You must have an AcuraLink Real-Time TrafficTM subscription to receive traffic information.
2 AcuraLink P. 314
The incident icons are displayed on the 5 mile (8 km) or less map scale.
2 Map Scale and Functions P. 83
Canadian models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 162
Map/Guidance: Allows you to select the map and guidance settings (display mode, icons to display on the map, map orientation, map color, and 3D view angle), display your current location, and an overview of the map features.
2 Guidance Mode P. 65 2 Showing Icons on Map P. 73 2 Color P. 75 2 View (Map Orientation) P. 78 2 3D Angle Adjustment P. 79 2 Current Location P. 81 2 Map Legend P. 82
Pause Guidance: Pauses your current route. 2 Pausing the Route P. 169
Resume Guidance: Resumes your current route. This item is displayed while the route guidance is paused.
Hide Traffic Flow: Hides the current traffic flow indicator on the map screen. 2 Hide Traffic Flow P. 163
Display Traffic Flow: Displays the current traffic flow indicator on the map screen. This item is displayed while the current traffic flow indicator is hidden.
Directions: Displays a list of the guidance points. 2 Directions P. 163
Search Nearby: Allows you to find the nearest place/landmark (e.g., nearest gas station) by specifying a category. You can then add the location to the list of destinations, set as a waypoint, or set as your destination.
2 Find Nearest Place P. 177
Traffic Incidents: Displays a list of the traffic incidents around your current location or on your current route.
2 Traffic ReroutingTM P. 165
uuMap MenuuHide Traffic Flow N
avig atio
n
1 Directions
Guidance points with exit information are indicated by a (freeway/highway exit information) icon. Move to select Exit Info to display the exit information.
2 Freeway/Highway Exit Information P. 164
The system provides freeway/highway exit information only in the U.S.
The route guidance information is automatically deleted when you reach your destination.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 163
Hide Traffic Flow H ENTER button (on map) u Hide Traffic Flow
Hide the traffic flow indicator on the map screen. Press the ENTER button and select Display Traffic Flow to display the traffic flow indicator on the map screen.
Directions H ENTER button (on map) u Directions
Display a list of the guidance points on your route for your confirmation. 1. Rotate to select a guidance
point from the list. Press . u The system displays a map of
the guidance point.
2. Press to select Back to list or press the BACK button to return to the previous screen.
163Continued
uuMap MenuuDirections
164
N avig
atio n
1 Freeway/Highway Exit Information
You can scroll the map and select a (Freeway/ Highway exit information) icon on the map screen to display the Freeway/Highway exit information. The
icon is only displayed if there is exit information available.
Icons are displayed only at 1/4, 1/2, or 1 mile (400 m, 800 m, or 1.6 km) scale.
2 Map Scale and Functions P. 83
The system provides freeway/highway exit information only in the U.S.
The route guidance information is automatically deleted when you reach your destination.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 164
H ENTER button (on map) u Directions u Exit Info
Display a list of the Freeway/highway exits for the route. You can view freeway/ highway exit information (whether the exit is near gas stations, restaurants, ATMs, etc.) and add new destinations or waypoints to the calculated route.
1. Rotate to select an exit from the list. Press .
2. Rotate to select a list item. Press . u Move or to display
information for different exits. u You can set the route to your
destination. 2 Calculating the Route P. 151
Freeway/Highway Exit Information
uuMap MenuuTraffic ReroutingTM N
avig atio
n
1 Traffic ReroutingTM
Traffic information is only available in certain areas.
Automatic traffic rerouting may not provide a detour route depending on circumstances.
The route is recalculated only when Traffic Rerouting is set to On.
2 Traffic Rerouting P. 60
This feature requires an AcuraLink Real-Time TrafficTM subscription. AcuraLink Real-Time TrafficTM is a subscription service. For more information, contact an Acura dealer or www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink.
Canadian models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 165
Traffic ReroutingTM
When driving to your destination, the system automatically searches for a faster route based on traffic flow information and traffic incidents.
2 Traffic Information*/AcuraLink Real-Time Traffic* P. 10 2 Traffic Rerouting P. 60
165Continued * Not available on all models
uuMap MenuuTraffic ReroutingTM
166
N avig
atio n
1 Traffic ReroutingTM Manually
Traffic rerouting is only available in certain areas.
You must be in or near a traffic-enabled city to receive coverage for that area. Traffic information is available in certain areas in the lower 48 states, Hawaii, and some cities in Canada.
2 Traffic Information P. 406
You can choose to avoid up to 10 traffic incidents. It is not always possible for the system to calculate a route that avoids all traffic incidents or specific traffic incidents you select.
The On Route tab on the Traffic List screen is only available during route guidance.
You cannot select an incident to avoid from the All tab.
You can also detour around a traffic incident manually if you encounter an unexpected obstacle.
2 Taking a Detour P. 176
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 166
H ENTER button (on map) u Traffic Incidents
Manually avoid specific incidents and/or congestion on your route: 1. Rotate to select an incident
from the list. Press . u The system displays the map
screen and the incident location.
2. Rotate to select Avoid. Press .
u Repeat step 1 to 2 as necessary.
Traffic ReroutingTM Manually
uuMap MenuuTraffic ReroutingTM N
avig atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 167
3. Move to select Recalculate Route. Press . u The system recalculates a
detour route that avoids the traffic incidents.
167
168
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 168
Changing Your Route
1 Changing Your Route
If you press the MENU button when not en route, the Destination Menu screen is displayed.
2 Entering a Destination P. 126
H MENU button (when en route)
This section describes how to alter your route, add an interim waypoint (pit stop), choose a different destination, cancel your current destination, and continue your trip after stopping.
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Voice: Select to hear the voice guidance when en route.
2 Listening to Voice Guidance P. 159
Destination List: Shows a list of waypoints. You can delete waypoints or edit the order of them.
2 Editing the Destination List P. 174
Pause Guidance: Pauses your current route. 2 Pausing the Route P. 169
Resume Guidance: Resumes your current route. This item is displayed while the route guidance is paused.
Cancel Route: Cancels the route guidance. 2 Canceling the Route P. 169
View Routes: Displays three different routes. 2 Viewing the Routes P. 153
uuChanging Your RouteuPausing the Route N
avig atio
n
1 Pausing the Route
You can also pause your route from the Map Menu. 2 Map Menu P. 161
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 169
Change Route Preference: Changes the route preferences (calculating method).
2 Route Preference P. 56
Detour: Calculates a detour route. 2 Taking a Detour P. 176
Avoid Streets: Avoids streets along your route. 2 Avoiding Streets P. 176
Pausing the Route H MENU button (when en route) u Pause Guidance
Pause the route guidance and return to the map screen. The destination icons and all waypoint flags remain displayed on the map. Press the MENU button when en route and select Resume Guidance to resume the route guidance.
Canceling the Route H MENU button (when en route) u Cancel Route
Cancel the route guidance and remove the destination and all waypoints from the destination list. The system then returns to the map screen.
169
170
uuChanging Your RouteuAdding Waypoints
N avig
atio n
1 Adding Waypoints
Waypoints allow you to stop for gas or food, for example, and then continue on to your destination.
Press the NAV button to return to the map screen without adding a waypoint at any time.
The search corridor used for adding waypoints can be adjusted.
2 Edit POI Search Radius Along Route P. 61
You can delete waypoints or edit the order of waypoints in the destination list.
2 Editing the Destination List P. 174
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 170
Adding Waypoints Add up to four waypoints (pit stops) along the route to your destination.
Waypoints are displayed on the map screen as small, numbered red flags. The route follows the waypoints in the order they are listed in the Destination List.
uuChanging Your RouteuAdding Waypoints N
avig atio
n
1 Adding Waypoints from the Route Menu
Search method
Search around method
Search along method 2 mi (3 km)
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 171
H MENU button (when en route) u Destination List u Add New Destination u Find Along Route
1. Rotate to select a search method to add a waypoint. Press
.
The following items are available: Search Around: Searches in a spiral pattern around the location you select. Search Along: Searches within a corridor on either side of the location you
select. 2. Rotate to select a waypoint
category (e.g., GAS STATION). Press .
Adding Waypoints from the Route Menu
Continued 171
172
uuChanging Your RouteuAdding Waypoints
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 172
3. Rotate to select a place. Press .
u The waypoint is added to the Destination List.
4. Rotate to select a location and move the order of destinations. Press .
5. Move and rotate to select Start Route. Press . u The route is automatically
recalculated and displayed on the map screen.
uuChanging Your RouteuAdding Waypoints N
avig atio
n
1 Adding Waypoints from the Navigation Menu
You can edit the order of waypoints and destination. 2 Editing the Destination List P. 174
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 173
H MENU button (when en route) u Destination List u Add New Destination
1. Rotate to select a method to enter a waypoint.
2 Entering a Destination P. 126
u A new destination is added to the end of the Destination list.
2. Move and rotate to select Start Route. Press . u The route is automatically
recalculated and displayed on the map screen.
Adding Waypoints from the Navigation Menu
173
174
uuChanging Your RouteuEditing the Destination List
N avig
atio n
1 Editing the Order of Waypoints
Move to rotate to select Show All on Map to display the destination and waypoints on the map screen.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 174
Editing the Destination List
H MENU button (when en route) u Destination List
1. Move and rotate to select Edit Order. Press .
2. Rotate to select a list item to move. Press .
3. Rotate to select a new location. Press .
4. Move and rotate to select Start Route. Press . u The route is automatically
recalculated and displayed on the map screen.
Editing the Order of Waypoints
uuChanging Your RouteuEditing the Destination List N
avig atio
n
1 Deleting Waypoints
Move and rotate to select Delete All to delete the destination and all the waypoints.
Select Show on Map to display the waypoint on the map screen.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 175
H MENU button (when en route) u Destination List
1. Rotate to select a list item to delete. Press .
2. Rotate to select Delete. Press .
3. Rotate to select Yes. Press .
Deleting Waypoints
175
176
uuChanging Your RouteuTaking a Detour
N avig
atio n
1 Taking a Detour
The detour option is convenient if you encounter an unexpected obstacle such as a road closure or extremely heavy traffic congestion.
1 Avoiding Streets
Avoiding certain streets is convenient if you know of road construction, road closures, or excessive traffic along the route.
You cannot choose specific streets you want to use, only those to avoid. However, you can select intersections or waypoints (places/landmarks) that the system will use in your route.
2 Adding Waypoints P. 170
You can store up to 10 streets to avoid. You cannot avoid your current street or the streets of your waypoint(s) or destination (system beeps if selected).
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 176
Taking a Detour H MENU button (when en route) u Detour
Calculate a detour route manually. The system attempts to calculate a new route by avoiding the next 5 miles (8 km) (while on a freeway/highway) or 1 mile (1.6 km) (while on a surface street).
Avoiding Streets H MENU button (when en route) u Avoid Streets
Select a street or streets along your route to avoid. 1. Rotate to select the street you
want to avoid. Press . u Repeat the procedure to avoid
other streets.
2. Move to select Recalculate Route. Press . u The system calculates a new
route.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 177
Changing Your Destination
avig atio
n
There are several methods you can use to change the route destination.
Find Nearest Place H ENTER button (on map) u Search Nearby
Search for the nearest place/landmark on the map screen and set it as your destination.
1. Rotate to select Search Nearby. Press .
2. Rotate to select a category type. Press .
3. Rotate to select a place. Press .
4. Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press .
5. Move to select Clear Current Route. Press . u The route is automatically
recalculated and displayed on the map screen.
u Rotate to edit the order to set the location as a new waypoint. Press .
177
178
uuChanging Your DestinationuSelecting a Destination on the Map
N avig
atio n
1 Selecting a Destination on the Map
If there is more than one icon or street under the map cursor, you are prompted to select the item from a list.
Rotate to select an item. Press .
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 178
Selecting a Destination on the Map Select a new destination when en route by selecting a location on the map.
1. Scroll the map to position the cursor over your desired destination, adjusting the map scale as necessary. Press . u If the address displayed is not
the desired location, press the BACK button and repeat the procedure.
2. Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press .
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
3. Move to select Clear Current Route. Press . u The route is automatically
recalculated and displayed on the map screen.
u Rotate to edit the order to set the location as a new waypoint. Press .
uuChanging Your DestinationuEntering a New Destination N
avig atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 179
Entering a New Destination H MENU button (when en route) u Destination
Enter a new destination using the Destination Menu screen even when you are en route.
1. Rotate to select a method to enter a new destination.
2 Entering a Destination P. 126
u After entering a new destination, the address is displayed on the Calculate Route screen.
2. Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press .
3. Move to select Clear Current Route. Press . u The route is automatically
recalculated and displayed on the map screen.
u Rotate to edit the order to set the location as a new waypoint. Press .
179
180
N avig
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 180
Resuming Your Trip
1 Resuming Your Trip
The Continue Trip screen has the same options as when you calculate a route.
2 Calculating the Route P. 151
You can also cancel your destination by pressing any hard button except the button.
Search Nearby You can find the nearest place/landmark (e.g., nearest gas station) by specifying a category.
2 Find Nearest Place P. 177 Call You can place a telephone call to the destination phone number.
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 266 Save to Address Book You can add the destination address to the address book.
2 Adding an Address Book Entry P. 42 Edit/Delete Entry You can edit or delete the address book entry.
2 Editing an Address Book Entry P. 44 2 Deleting an Address Book Entry P. 45
Edit Home Entry You can edit your home address entry.
2 Home Address P. 48 More Info You can view detailed information about the destination.
Stop your vehicle en route (e.g., to rest, stop for gas, etc.), and then continue on your route. If you did not complete your route, the Continue Trip screen is displayed when you restart your vehicle.
Rotate to select Set as Destination. Press . u You can continue on the same
route. u Move to scroll the map
around the destination. u Press the BACK button to cancel
your destination.
View Routes: Displays three different routes. 2 Viewing the Routes P. 153
Route Preference: Move to select Route Preference to change the route preferences (calculating method).
2 Route Preference P. 56
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 181
Audio
This section describes how to operate the audio system. You can play music from a wide
array of media sources, and control the audio system using the audio buttons, the
Interface Dial, or voice control.
81
Audio System .................................................. 182 About Your Audio System.............................. 182 USB Ports ....................................................... 183 Auxiliary Input Jack ........................................ 185 Audio System Theft Protection ....................... 185 Setting Audio Shortcuts ................................. 186 Customizing Audio Source ............................. 187
Audio Remote Controls .................................. 188 Steering Wheel Controls ................................ 188
Audio Settings ................................................. 190 Adjusting the Sound ...................................... 193
Playing FM/AM Radio ..................................... 194 Selecting FM/AM Mode.................................. 194 Audio Screen Control..................................... 195 Audio Menu .................................................. 198
Playing SiriusXM Radio ................................. 200 Selecting SiriusXM Mode.............................. 200 Audio Screen Control..................................... 201
* Not available on all models
Audio Menu...................................................215 SiriusXM Radio Service..................................218
Playing a Disc ...................................................220 Selecting Disc Mode .......................................220 Audio Screen Control .....................................221 Audio Menu...................................................222 Recommended CDs........................................225
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio ............227 Selecting HDD Mode ......................................227 Recording a Music CD to HDD........................228 Audio Screen Control .....................................229 Audio Menu...................................................230
Playing an iPod ................................................239 Selecting iPod Mode.......................................240 Audio Screen Control .....................................241 Audio Menu...................................................243 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) ....................................246
1
Playing Internet Radio .................................... 251 Selecting Internet Radio Mode ....................... 251 Pandora Menu* ........................................... 252 AhaTM Radio Menu......................................... 254
Playing a USB Flash Drive ............................... 256 Selecting USB Mode....................................... 257 Audio Screen Control..................................... 258 Audio Menu .................................................. 259
Playing Bluetooth Audio .............................. 262 Selecting Bluetooth Audio Mode.................. 262 Audio Screen Control..................................... 263
182
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 182
Audio System
1 About Your Audio System
SiriusXM Radio is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM Radio, contact a dealer.
2 SiriusXM Radio Service P. 218
SiriusXM Radio is available in the U.S. and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3 in (80 mm) mini CDs are not supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate the screen without polarized sunglasses.
About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and the SiriusXM Radio service. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disc Drive (HDD) audio, USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth devices. You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
Remote Controls
iPod
USB Flash Drive
uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports A
u d
io
1 USB Ports
Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disc drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturers instructions provided with the iPod or visit the following website: U.S.: www.apple.com/ipod. Canada: www.apple.com/ca/ipod.
The USB port can supply up to 1.0A or 2.5A of power. It does not output 1.0A or 2.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON first.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 183
USB Ports In the front console
compartment The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive and connecting a cellular phone and charging device.
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.
On the back of the front console compartment*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.
USB Ports (2.5A)
USB Port (1.0A)
Models without RES
Models with RES
183Continued * Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Ports
184
A u
d io
1 USB Ports
This port is for battery charge only. You cannot play music even if you have connected a music player to it.
Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to.
USB Ports (2.5A)
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 184
In the rear console compartment*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.
On the back of the rear console compartment*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack A
u d
io
1 Auxiliary Input Jack
You can return to the AUX mode by selecting Change Source on the Audio menu screen or Source on the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 185
Auxiliary Input Jack Use the jack to connect standard audio devices. 1. Open the AUX cover. 2. Connect a standard audio device
to the input jack using a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo miniplug. u The audio system automatically
switches to the AUX mode.
Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the (Power) button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
Reactivate the Audio System
185
186
uuAudio SystemuSetting Audio Shortcuts
A u
d io
1 Setting Audio Shortcuts
You can also preset a station or song by pressing and holding the preset icon you want to store that station or song after step 3.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 186
Setting Audio Shortcuts You can store up to six radio stations, and HDD audio album/play lists when playing AM, FM, SiriusXM radio, or HDD audio.
1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Tune to a radio station or select a
song. 2 Playing FM/AM Radio P. 194 2 Playing SiriusXM Radio
P. 200 2 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD)
Audio P. 227
3. Select Audio. 4. Select Edit or No Entry.
u If you select No Entry, go to step 6.
5. Select Add. 6. Select the preset icon you want to
store the station or song to.
Storing a Station or Song
uuAudio SystemuCustomizing Audio Source A
u d
io
1 Customizing Audio Source
This operation is not allowed while the vehicle is in motion.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 187
1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Select Audio. 3. Select Edit. 4. Select Delete. 5. Select the preset icon with the radio station or a song you want to delete.
Customizing Audio Source You can customize order of the source list icons.
1. Select Source. 2. Select Edit Order from the second
screen. 3. Select two icons you want to
swap. 4. Select Done.
u Select Default to reset the customized order.
Deleting a Preset Station or Song
187
188
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 188
Audio Remote Controls
1 Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
The USB mode, iPod mode, Bluetooth Audio mode, Pandora* mode, and AhaTM mode appear when a connection (Bluetooth or USB) is established with a device.
To select audio mode, press the SOURCE button, then move the left selector wheel to the right or left.
Steering Wheel Controls Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: FMAMSiriusXMCDHDD USBiPodBluetooth AudioPandora*AhaTMAUX
Left Selector Wheel Roll Up: To increase the volume. Roll Down: To decrease the volume. Push: To mute. Push again to unmute. When listening to the radio
Move to the right: To select the next preset radio station. Move to the left: To select the previous preset radio station. Move to the right and hold: To select the next strong station. Move to the left and hold: To select the previous strong station.
When listening to a CD, HDD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth Audio Move to the right: To skip to the next song. Move to the left: To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. Move to the right and hold: To go to the next folder. (Bluetooth Audio only) Move to the left and hold: To go to the previous folder. (Bluetooth Audio only)
Left Selector Wheel
SOURCE Button
* Not available on all models
uuAudio Remote ControlsuSteering Wheel Controls A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 189
When listening to a CD, HDD or USB flash drive Move to the right and hold: To skip to the next folder. Move to the left and hold: To go back to the previous folder.
When listening to Pandora* and AhaTM
Move to the right: To skip to the next song. Move to the right and hold: To select the next station. Move to the left and hold: To select the previous station.
189* Not available on all models
190
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 190
Audio Settings
1 Audio Settings
The Play Song from Beginning function is based on TuneStartTM technology of SiriusXM.
TuneStartTM is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
H SETTINGS button u Audio Settings
1. Move or to select an audio mode you want to set.
2. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available:
SXM tab SportsFlash (SiriusXM mode):
Notification: Sets whether a notification comes on the screen when the system receives a sports alert. If you select Enable (one time), the system enables the notification until turning the vehicle off. Beep: Turns on or off the beep that sounds every time the pop-up message interrupts other audio mode screen. Favorite Teams: Stores up to five favorite teams. Certain sports may require additional station subscriptions.
Play Song from Beginning (SiriusXM mode): Turns on or off the Tune Start function that begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel.
Traffic & Weather Now Setup (SiriusXM mode): Selects a city for using the SiriusXM traffic and weather information.
Channel Art (SiriusXM mode): Turns on and off the channel art display.
uuAudio Settingsu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 191
CD/HDD tab Recording from CD (CD mode): Selects whether the songs on music CDs are
automatically recorded to the HDD. Recording Quality (CD mode): Selects the quality of the music files recorded to
the HDD. HDD Info (HDD mode): Displays the HDD capacity. Update Gracenote Album Info (CD or HDD mode): Updates the Gracenote
Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) from CD or from USB. 2 Updating Gracenote Album Info P. 237
Delete All HDD Data (HDD mode): Resets all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.
Bluetooth tab Bluetooth Device List (Bluetooth Audio mode): Edits or deletes Bluetooth
Audio device paired. Connect Bluetooth Audio Device (Bluetooth Audio, Pandora* or AhaTM
mode): Connects, disconnects, or pairs a Bluetooth Audio device to HFL.
191Continued * Not available on all models
192
uuAudio Settingsu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 192
DVD tab*
DVD Auto Play (DVD mode): Turns the auto play feature on or off. Audio Language (DVD mode): Selects a language for the audio that is available
on the DVD. Subtitle Language (DVD mode): Selects a language for the subtitle that is
available on the DVD. Menu Language (DVD mode): Selects a language for the DVD menu that is
available on the DVD. Dynamic Range (DVD mode): Sets whether to control the range of the loud and
low sounds.
Other tab Source Select Popup: Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources comes
on when the AUDIO button is pressed. HD Radio Mode* (AM/FM mode): Selects whether the audio system
automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analogue waves only.
Cover Art (CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod, USB, Pandora* or AhaTM mode): Turns on and off the cover art display.
Default: Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio Settings group as default.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SettingsuAdjusting the Sound A
u d
io
1 Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
DTS Neural Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
When available, DTS Neural Surround converts stereo sound into surround sound.
Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
You can also adjust the sound to select on the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 193
Adjusting the Sound H MENU button u Sound
Adjust the sound bass, treble, fader, and balance. You can also adjust the strength of the sound coming from the center and subwoofer speakers. In addition, you can set Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC) and DTS Neural Surround.
1. Rotate to select the sound mode to adjust. Press .
2. Rotate to adjust the desired level. Press .
1. Select More. 2. Select Sound. 3. Use , or other icon to adjust
the setting. u Use the / icons to turn
the page. u Select to go back to the
previous screen.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
193
194
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 194
Playing FM/AM Radio
1 Selecting FM/AM Mode
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice commands.
2 Radio FM Commands P. 417
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
The radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands: AM band: 530 to 1710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.
Selecting FM/AM Mode
1. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 2. Rotate to select Change Source. Press . 3. Rotate to select the frequency band (FM, AM). Press .
u The band and frequency are displayed on the audio/information screen.
1. Select Source. 2. Select the frequency band (FM, AM) icon.
u The band and frequency are displayed on the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying FM/AM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 195
Audio Screen Control Control the audio system through the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
Rotate to select a station from the list. Press . u Rotate and select Refresh to
update the station list at any time. u Press the MENU button to display
the menu items. 2 Audio Menu P. 198
Interface Dial
Frequency band
195Continued
196
uuPlaying FM/AM RadiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 196
The following items are available: : Tune the radio frequency. On the preset screen, select and hold to search
up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. : Search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong
signal. Preset Number: Select and hold a desired number where you want to store the
station. Select to listen to a preset station. More: Display the menu items.
2 Audio Menu P. 198
Scan: Scans for stations with a strong signal in the current band and plays a 10- second sample. Select Stop Scan to stop scanning and play the current selection.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Preset screen
Select Tune.
Select Presets.
Tune screen
Preset Number
uuPlaying FM/AM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 197
To store a station: 1. Tune to the desired station. 2. Move to select Presets. 3. Rotate to select a desired number on the preset station list. 4. Press and hold a few seconds to store the current station. To listen to a stored station, rotate to select the preset number. Press .
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station on preset screen. 2. Select and hold a desired number. To listen to a stored station, select the preset number.
Preset Memory Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
197
198
uuPlaying FM/AM RadiouAudio Menu
A u
d io
1 Audio Menu
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio and Arc logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity digital Corp.
U.S. models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 198
Audio Menu H MENU button (in FM/AM mode)
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Refresh Station List: Updates a station list. Radio Text: Displays the text information broadcast by the current RDS station. Save Preset: Stores the station into the preset memory. Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Scan: Scans for stations with a strong signal in the current band and plays a 10-
second sample. Select Stop Scan to stop scanning and play the current selection. Tune/Seek: Tunes the radio to the frequency you select. Rotate to select a
frequency, then press . HD Subchannel*: Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is
selected.
Interface Dial
* Not available on all models
uuPlaying FM/AM RadiouAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 199
1. Select More. 2. Select a setting item.
The following items are available: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Save Preset: Stores the station into the preset memory. Screen Settings: Adjusts the screens preferences.
2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
Scan: Scans for stations with a strong signal in the current band and plays a 10- second sample. Select Stop Scan to stop scanning and play the current selection.
HD Subchannel*: Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
199* Not available on all models
200
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 200
Playing SiriusXM Radio
1 Playing SiriusXM Radio
You can control the SiriusXM radio using voice commands.
2 Radio SXM Commands P. 417
In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
SiriusXM Radio channels load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded, you can scroll up or down to make your selections.
Selecting SiriusXM Mode
1. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 2. Rotate to select Change Source. Press . 3. Rotate to select SXM. Press .
u The category, channel list, and presets are displayed on the audio/information screen.
1. Select Source. 2. Select the SiriusXM icon.
u The category and channel are displayed on the On Demand Multi-Use displayTM.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 201
Audio Screen Control Control the audio system through the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
1. Rotate to select a category. Press . u Move if you want to select
from the current channel list or presets.
2. Rotate to select a channel. Press . u Press the MENU button to
display the menu items. 2 Audio Menu P. 215
Interface Dial
201Continued
202
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 202
The following items are available: Category bar (Tune screen): Select or to search a category. Channel bar: Select or to search a channel. Select and hold or to
search up or down 10 channels. Preset Number (Preset screen): Select a preset channel. Select and hold to
search a channel. Playback: Display the Playback screen.
2 Replay Function P. 205
More: Display the menu items. 2 Audio Menu P. 215
Scan: Scans for channels in the selected mode or Presets and plays a 10-second sample. Select Stop Scan to stop scanning and play the current selection.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Select Tune.
Preset screen Tune screen
Select Presets.
Preset Number
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 Preset Memory
You can store 12 SiriusXM channels into the preset memory.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 203
To store a channel: 1. Tune to the desired channel. 2. Move to select Presets. 3. Rotate to select a desired number. 4. Press and hold a few seconds to store the current channel. To listen to a stored channel, rotate to select the preset number. Press .
To store a channel: 1. Tune to the desired channel. 2. Select and hold a desired number. To listen to a stored channel, select the preset number.
Preset Memory Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Continued 203
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control
204
A u
d io
1 Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
Not all SiriusXM channels are available to add to multi-channel preset.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 204
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)
You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset. When multiple channels exist, the music randomly skips between channels.
1. Select a channel you want to store.
2. Select More. 3. Select Save Preset. 4. Select Edit TuneMix. 5. Select a preset number where you
want to add a music channel. 6. Select Add.
u Select OK or to return the previous screen.
To delete a multi-channel preset: 1. Select More. 2. Select Save Preset. 3. Select Edit TuneMix. 4. Select a multi-channel preset number. 5. Select Delete. 6. Select channel icon.
u Select OK or to return the previous screen.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the vehicle is turned on. You can go back to the program from that point. You can no longer replay any program once the vehicle is turned off or if the non-preset channel has been changed. The audio/information screen displays how long the station has been recording in the replay status bar.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 205
H MENU button (in SiriusXM mode) u Playback
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes broadcast of your currently tuned channel as well as the last 30 minutes broadcast of preset channels, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
Select an option.
The following options are available: OK: Returns to previous channel. Play/Pause: Pauses or plays a storing broadcast. Go to Live: Returns to real-time broadcast. Skip Down: Skips to the previously stored channel. Skip Up: Skips to the next channel. 15sec Back: Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and
hold to fast-rewind the current selection. 15sec Skip: Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and
hold to fast-forward the current selection.
Replay Function
Continued 205
206
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 206
To play or pause in playback mode: Rotate to select Play/Pause, press .
Returning to real-time broadcast Rotate to select Go to Live, press while listening to the playback channel.
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 207
1. Select Playback. 2. Select an option.
The following options are available: (15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select
and hold to fast-rewind the current selection. (15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select
and hold to fast-forward the current selection. (Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. (Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. (Play/Pause): Pauses or plays a storing broadcast. (Live): Returns to real-time broadcast. OK: Returns to previous channel.
To play or pause in playback mode: Select .
Returning to real-time broadcast Select while listening to the playback channel.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
207Continued
208
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 208
Replay status display Display the replay status on the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use displayTM when you listen to the playback. Interface Dial
Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast
Stored length in the memory
Replayed segment
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast
Stored length in the memory
Replayed segment
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 SportsFlashTM Alert
The notification message does not appear on the audio/information screen under the following circumstances: When you select a source other than the SiriusXM
Mode. When the start-up screen and Multi-view Rear
Camera screen are displayed.
When a sports alert is received, the SportsFlashTM Listen indicator appears on the audio/information screen.
You can change the SportsFlashTM setting. 2 Audio Settings P. 190
SportsFlashTM is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 209
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from up to five of your favorite teams. The notification message appears on the audio/ information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM when receiving sports alerts.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert.
2. Select Listen Now. u Press the BACK button to
return the previous screen. u If no operations are performed
for 10 seconds, the system returns to the previous audio mode automatically.
The following items are available: Check Later: Returns to the previous screen and stores the received sports alert
in the audio system. If other sports alerts are received in the same game, the notification message appears again.
Ignore this Game: Returns to the previous screen and stores the received sports alert in the audio system. If other sports alerts are received in the same game, the notification message does not appear.
SportsFlashTM Alert
Interface Dial
Continued 209
210
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 210
3. Select an option.
The following options are available: Back: Returns to the previous screen. Play/Pause: Pauses or plays a current sports alert. Go to Live: Returns to real-time broadcast. Skip Down: Skips to the previously stored sports alert. Skip Up: Skips to the next stored sports alert. 15sec Back: Select to skip back 15 seconds to the current sports alert. Select and
hold to fast-rewind the current sports alert. 15sec Skip: Select to skip forward 30 seconds to the current sports alert. Select
and hold to fast-forward the current sports alert.
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 211
1. Select an item. u Select to return to the
previous screen. u If no operations are performed
for 10 seconds, the system returns to the previous screen automatically.
The following items are available: Listen Now: Plays the received sports alert in the current game. Ignore this Game: Returns to the previous screen and stores the received sports
alert in the audio system. If other sports alerts are received in the same game, the notification message does not appear.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
211Continued
212
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 212
2. Select an option.
The following options are available: (15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds to the current sports alert. Select
and hold to fast-rewind the current sports alert. (15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds to the current sports alert.
Select and hold to fast-forward the current sports alert. (Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored sports alert. (Skip Up): Skips to the next stored sports alert. (Play/Pause): Pauses or plays a current sports alert. (Live): Returns to real-time broadcast. Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Listening to a missed sports alert
If you have missed a sports alert: 1. From the audio screen, press the MENU button. 2. Move to select Advanced. 3. Rotate to select SportsFlashTM, then press . 4. Rotate to select an alert, then press .
Interface Dial
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM mode only.
When you listen to the traffic and weather information service, set up the applicable city using Traffic & Weather Now Setup.
2 Audio Settings P. 190
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 213
H MENU button (in SiriusXM mode) u Advanced u Traffic & Weather Now You can receive the SiriusXM traffic and weather information. The information displays on the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
Select an option.
The following options are available: Back: Returns to previous channel. Play/Pause: Pauses or plays a storing broadcast. Go to Live: Returns to real-time broadcast. Skip Down: Skips to the previously stored channel. Skip Up: Skips to the next channel. 15sec Back: Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current broadcast. Select and
hold to fast-rewind the current broadcast. 15sec Skip: Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current broadcast. Select
and hold to fast-forward the current broadcast.
Traffic and Weather Information
Continued 213
214
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 214
1. Select More. 2. Select Traffic & Weather Now. 3. Select an option.
The following options are available: (15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current broadcast. Select
and hold to fast-rewind the current broadcast. (15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current broadcast.
Select and hold to fast-forward the current broadcast. (Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. (Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. (Play/Pause): Pauses or plays a storing broadcast. (Live): Returns to real-time broadcast. Back: Returns to previous channel.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Menu A
u d
io
1 Audio Menu
The Scan Songs in Presets function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM.
The Featured Channels function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM.
TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.
To find out more about these features, visit www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 215
Audio Menu
H MENU button (in SiriusXM mode) 1. Move or to select an item. 2. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available:
General tab Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Save Preset: Stores the current channel into the preset memory. Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Scan: Selects the scan type. Scans for channels and plays a 10-second sample.
Select Stop Scan to stop scanning and play the current channel. Scan Channels: Scans for categories or channels with a strong signal in the selected mode. Scan Songs in Presets: Scans for desired preset channel by songs. Select Skip Up or Skip Down to skip to the next/previous stored selection.
Playback: Displays the Playback screen. 2 Replay Function P. 205
Interface Dial
215Continued
216
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 216
Advanced tab Traffic & Weather Now: Displays the SiriusXM traffic and weather
information. Featured Channels: Displays the list of suggested channels from SiriusXM. Up
to three channel groups can be displayed. View Channel Schedule: Displays the channel schedule. SportsFlash: Displays the list of available sports alerts. Up to two sports alerts can
be displayed.
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 217
1. Select More. 2. Select a setting item.
The following items are available: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Save Preset: Stores the channel into the preset memory. Set to store up to five of your preferred music channels per preset if the Preset icon is highlighted.
2 Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) P. 204
Traffic & Weather Now: Displays the SiriusXM traffic and weather information.
Scan: Selects the scan type. Scans for channels and plays a 10-second sample. Select Stop Scan to stop scanning and play the current channel. Scan Channels: Scans for categories or channels with a strong signal in the selected mode. Scan Songs in Presets: Scans for desired preset channel by songs. Select or
to skips to the next/previous stored selection. Tune Mode: Sets the tune mode.
Channel: Tune to select all available channels. Category: Tune to select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classic, etc.).
Screen Settings: Adjusts the screens preferences. 2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
217
218
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouSiriusXM Radio Service
A u
d io
1 Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM Radio: U.S.: SiriusXM Radio at www.siriusxm.com or (800) 852-9696 Canada: SiriusXM Canada at www.siriusxm.ca, or 1-877-438-9677
1 Receiving SiriusXM Radio
The SiriusXM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle In tunnels On the lower level of a multi-tiered road Large items carried on the roof rack
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 218
SiriusXM Radio Service
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the display: Operate the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM until channel 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM website to subscribe.
Switch to the SiriusXM mode by pressing the SOURCE button on the steering wheel, or through the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Subscribing to SiriusXM Radio
Receiving SiriusXM Radio
uuPlaying SiriusXM RadiouSiriusXM Radio Service A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 219
Loading: SiriusXM is loading the audio or program information. Channel off air: The channel is not currently broadcasting. Channel unsubscribed: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. No signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Channel unavailable: No such channel exists. Check antenna, Antenna disconnected, Antenna shorted: There is a problem with the SiriusXM antenna. Contact a dealer.
SiriusXM Radio Display Messages
219
220
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 220
Playing a Disc
1 Playing a Disc
NOTICE Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA and ACC files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: When you select a new folder, file, or track. When you change the audio mode to CD. When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD, but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds.
You can control a CD audio using voice commands. 2 Disc Commands P. 417
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or AAC format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Selecting Disc Mode
1. Insert a disc into the disc slot. u The disc automatically begins playing.
2. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 3. Rotate to select Change Source. Press . 4. Rotate to select CD. Press .
1. Insert a disc into the disc slot. u The disc automatically begins playing.
2. Select Source. 3. Select the CD icon.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying a DiscuAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 Audio Screen Control
Random: Plays all tracks/files in random order. Repeat: Repeats the current track/file. Scan: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on
the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Select Stop Scan to stop scanning and play the current selection.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 221
Audio Screen Control Control the audio system through the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
1. Rotate or press to display the song list.
2. Rotate , move or to select a file from the list (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press . u Press the MENU button to
display the menu items. 2 Audio Menu P. 222
1. Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC.
2. Select or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Select and hold to move rapidly within a track/file. u Select More to display the
menu item. 2 Audio Menu P. 222
Track list
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
221
222
uuPlaying a DiscuAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 222
Audio Menu H MENU button (in CD mode)
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available, depending on the type of disc: Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Music Search: Selects a file from the Music Search list. 2 How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/AAC) P. 224
Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Scan:
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat: Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
Interface Dial
uuPlaying a DiscuAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 223
Rec to HDD: Records a music CD onto the HDD for playback using HDD Audio. 2 Recording a Music CD to HDD P. 228
1. Select More. 2. Select a setting item.
The following items are available, depending on the type of disc: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Screen Settings: Displays the screen preferences screen. 2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
223Continued
224
uuPlaying a DiscuAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 224
H MENU button (in CD mode) u Music Search
Rotate , move or to select a file from the Music Search list. Press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/ AAC)
uuPlaying a DiscuRecommended CDs A
u d
io
1 Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround and Neural Surround are trademarks of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 225
Recommended CDs Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC Files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
Also includes:
225Continued
uuPlaying a DiscuRecommended CDs
226
A u
d io
1 Protecting CDs
NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may get stuck inside and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
With Label/ Sticker
Using Printer Label Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
Bubbled/ Wrinkled
Warped Burrs
3 in (80 mm) CD
Chipped/ Cracked
Small CDs
Poor quality CDs
Damaged CDs
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 226
Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 227
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
u d
io
1 Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
You can control the HDD audio using voice commands.
2 HDD Commands P. 417 2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 246
Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed using ultra-efficient compression technology; therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and cannot be recovered.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the display.
2 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 393
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play the tracks using various search methods.
Selecting HDD Mode
1. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 2. Rotate to select Change Source. Press . 3. Rotate to select HDD. Press to play tracks stored on the HDD.
u Title information is displayed if found in the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) stored on the HDD.
u The HDD has two types of playlists: original playlists and user playlists. An original playlist is automatically created for each album when a music CD is recorded. You can customize up to six user playlists provided on the HDD by adding tracks from your original playlists.
1. Select Source. 2. Select the HDD icon to play tracks stored on the HDD.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
227
228
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouRecording a Music CD to HDD
A u
d io
1 Recording a Music CD to HDD
You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on the HDD.
2 Editing an Album or Playlist P. 233 2 Editing Track Information P. 235
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned off while recording a CD, there may be pauses between songs when you play back from the HDD.
Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available during recording.
You can play music from other sources (e.g., SiriusXM, HDD, etc.) while recording.
Please note that there is no compensation offered in the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
Clearing the HDD Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 228
Recording a Music CD to HDD When Recording from CD is set to Auto, the songs on music CDs are automatically recorded to the HDD the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.
2 Customized Features P. 90
1. Press the MENU button. (in CD mode) 2. Rotate to select Cancel Record to HDD. Press .
When Recording from CD is set to Manual, the songs on music CDs can be manually recorded to the HDD. 1. Press the MENU button. (in CD mode) 2. Rotate to select Rec to HDD. Press .
Stopping Recording
Recording a CD Manually
Recording indicator
Recording
Ready to record
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 Audio Screen Control
Repeat: Repeat Artist: Repeats all tracks in the current artist. Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current album. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.
Random: Random in Artist: Plays all tracks in the current artist in random order. Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current album in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.
Scan: Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the first track in each album. Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on HDD.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 229
Audio Screen Control Control the audio system through the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
1. Rotate or press to display the song list.
2. Rotate , move or to select a track from the list. Press
. u Press the MENU button to
display the menu items. 2 Audio Menu P. 230
1. Select skip to the next playlist/ album, and to skip to the beginning of the previous playlist/ album.
2. Select or to change tracks. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track. u Select More to display the
menu item. 2 Audio Menu P. 230
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
229
230
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 230
Audio Menu H MENU button (in HDD mode)
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Music Search: Selects a file from the Music Search list. 2 How to Select a Track from the Music Search List P. 232
Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Scan:
Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the first track in each album. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on HDD.
Random/Repeat: The following menu items vary depending on the category you selected by the Music Search list. Repeat Artist: Repeats all tracks in the current artist. Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current album. Repeat Track: Repeats the current track. Random in Artist: Plays all tracks in the current artist in random order. Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current album in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.
Interface Dial
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 231
Edit/Delete: Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
1. Select More. 2. Select a setting item.
The following items are available: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Screen Settings: Displays the screen preferences screen. 2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
231Continued
232
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 232
H MENU button (in HDD mode) u Music Search
1. Move or to select a search category. Press .
2. Rotate to select a track from the Music Search list. Press .
How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu A
u d
io
1 Editing an Album or Playlist
The maximum number of original playlists is 50 with a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.
Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a user playlist does not remove the playlist folder. The folder retains the playlist name and artist information.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 233
H MENU button (in HDD mode) u Edit/Delete
1. Rotate to select Albums or Playlist. Press .
2. Rotate to select an album or playlist that you want edit or delete. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen. 3. Rotate to select an item. Press
.
The following items are available: Edit Name: Enter a new name using the interface dial or the On Demand Multi-
Use DisplayTM. Delete: Deletes the selected album or playlist. List Tracks: Change the track title, artist name, genre, and composer. You can
also delete tracks.
Editing an Album or Playlist
Continued 233
234
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 234
H MENU button (in HDD mode) u Edit/Delete u Playlists u Create New Playlist
1. Enter the playlist name using the interface dial or the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
2. Select tracks from the music search list.
Creating a New Playlist
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 235
H MENU button (in HDD mode) u Edit/Delete u Tracks
Change the track title, artist name, genre, and composer. You can also delete tracks. Rotate select a track you want to edit or delete. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
The following items are available: Edit Name: Enter the track information (track name, track artist, etc.) using the
interface dial or the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM. Delete: Deletes a track.
Editing Track Information
235Continued
236
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 236
H MENU button (in HDD mode) u Edit/Delete
Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing the Gracenote Album Info.
1. Rotate to select Albums. Press .
2. Rotate to select an album that you want edit or delete. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen. 3. Rotate to select Edit Name.
Press .
4. Move to select Get Music Info. Press . u The system starts to access the
Gracenote Album Info.
Displaying Music Information
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu A
u d
io
1 Updating Gracenote Album Info
To acquire updated files: Consult a dealer. Visit http://www.navteq.com/gracenote/acura.
Once you perform an update, any information you edited before will be overwritten or erased.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 237
H SETTINGS button (in HDD mode) u Audio Settings u CD/HDD
Update the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) that is included with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or connect the USB flash drive that includes the update.
2. Rotate to select Update Gracenote Album Info. Press
.
3. Rotate to select Update by CD or Update by USB. Press . u The system starts updating and
the confirmation message appears on the screen. Press to finish.
Updating Gracenote Album Info
Continued 237
238
uuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) AudiouAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 238
H SETTINGS button u Audio Settings u CD/HDD u Delete All HDD Data
Delete all music data on the HDD. Rotate to select Yes. Press .
Deleting All HDD Data
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 239
Playing an iPod
u d
io
1 Connecting an iPod
Do not connect your iPod using a hub. Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disc drive, as the device or your tracks may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version.
Your audio system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
If the audio system does not recognize your iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
1. Open the USB cover. 2. Install the iPod USB connector to the USB port.
Connecting an iPod
Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 6th generation) released between 2007 and 2015
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/ iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6s/iPhone 6s Plus
239
240
uuPlaying an iPoduSelecting iPod Mode
A u
d io
1 Selecting iPod Mode
You can control an iPod using voice commands. 2 iPod Commands P. 417 2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 246
Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 394
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 240
Selecting iPod Mode
1. Connect the iPod to the USB port in the console compartment. 2. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 3. Rotate , select Change Source. Press . 4. Rotate , select iPod. Press .
1. Connect the iPod to the USB port in the console compartment. 2. Select Source. 3. Select the iPod icon.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying an iPoduAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 Audio Screen Control
Some functions may not be available depending on your phone's model or software version.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 241
Audio Screen Control Control the audio system through the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
1. Rotate or press to display the song list.
2. Rotate or move or to select a song from the list. Press
. u Press the MENU button to
display the menu items. 2 Audio Menu P. 243
Track list
Interface Dial
241Continued
242
uuPlaying an iPoduAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 242
The following items are available: (play/pause): Plays or pauses a song file. : Select the previous or next track. Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track. Album bar: Select to display the album search screen.
Select or to search for an album. Repeat: Repeats the current track. Shuffle:
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
More: Select to display the menu item. 2 Audio Menu P. 243
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Album Bar Select an album image.
Select the album bar.
Album Image
uuPlaying an iPoduAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 243
Audio Menu H MENU button (in iPod mode)
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Music Search: Selects a song from the Music Search list. 2 How to Select a Song from the Music Search List P. 245
Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Play/Pause: Pauses or plays a song file. Shuffle/Repeat:
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.
Interface Dial
243Continued
244
uuPlaying an iPoduAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 244
1. Select More. 2. Select a setting item.
The following items are available: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Screen Settings: Displays the screen preferences screen. 2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying an iPoduAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 245
H MENU button (in iPod mode) u Music Search
1. Rotate to select a search category. Press .
2. Rotate to select a file from the Music Search list. Press .
How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
245
246
uuPlaying an iPoduSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 246
Song By VoiceTM (SBV) Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod using voice commands.
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Song By Voice
Rotate to select On or Off. Press .
The following items are available: On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands are available. Off: Disable the feature.
Settings Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
uuPlaying an iPoduSong By VoiceTM (SBV) A
u d
io
1 Searching for Music Using Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Song By VoiceTM Commands List 2 Song By Voice Commands P. 417
NOTE: Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the HDD or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 248
SBV may not be able to recognize languages other than English for the artist name, song title, album title, and composers.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the (Talk) button and say Music Search again to re-activate this mode.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 247
1. Set the Song By Voice setting to On.
2. Press the (Talk) button and say Music Search to activate the SBV feature for the HDD and iPod.
3. Say a command. u Example 1: Say (List) Artist
A to view a list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say Play Artist A to start playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the (Hang-Up/Back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing.
Searching for Music Using Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Continued 247
uuPlaying an iPoduSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
248
A u
d io
1 Phonetic Modification
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 248
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Song By Voice Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the HDD or iPod.
1. Move and rotate to select New Modification. Press .
2. Rotate to select HDD or iPod. Press .
Phonetic Modification
uuPlaying an iPoduSong By VoiceTM (SBV) A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 249
3. Rotate to select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). Press . u The list of the selected item
appears on the screen.
4. Rotate to select an entry (e.g., No Name). Press . u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen. 5. Rotate to select Modify. Press
. u To listen to the current
phonetic modification, rotate to select Play. Press .
u To delete the current phonetic modification, rotate to select Delete. Press .
249Continued
250
uuPlaying an iPoduSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 250
6. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to use (e.g., Artist A) when prompted.
7. Rotate to select OK to exit. The artist No Name is phonetically modified to Artist A. When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command Play Artist A to play songs by the artist No Name.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 251
Playing Internet Radio
u d
io
1 Selecting Internet Radio Mode
To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, call 1-888-528-7876 or visit acura.com/ handsfreelink (U.S.) or handsfreelink.ca (Canada).
Selecting Internet Radio Mode
1. Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth. 2. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 3. Rotate to select Change Source. Press . 4. Rotate to select Pandora* or Aha. Press .
1. Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth. 2. Select Source. 3. Select the Pandora* or Aha icon.
You can also connect the phone using your USB connector to the USB port.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
iPhone
251Continued * Not available on all models
uuPlaying Internet RadiouPandora Menu*
252
A u
d io
1 Pandora Menu*
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
Pandora is a personalized Internet radio service that selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
You can control Pandora using voice commands. 2 Pandora Commands* P. 417
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora* P. 395
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth Audio.
Make sure Pandora mode on your audio system is selected.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 252
Pandora Menu*
Rotate to select an item. Press .
u Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
The following items are available: Create Station: Create a new station from genre, current track, or artist. Skip Forward: Skip the current song. Play/Pause: Pauses or plays a song. Station List: Displays the list of all your stored stations. Select a station from the
list to play. Like: Likes the current song. Pandora will play songs similar to the one liked. Dislike: Dislikes the current song and skips to the next song. Pandora will avoid
playing songs similar to the one disliked. Bookmark Track: Bookmarks the current song. Bookmark Artist: Bookmarks the current artist.
U.S. models
Interface Dial
* Not available on all models
uuPlaying Internet RadiouPandora Menu* A
u d
io
1 Pandora Menu*
There are restrictions on the number of songs you can skip or dislike in a given hour.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 253
1. Select or to change a station.
2. Select to skip a song. u Select to pause or play a
song. u Select or to evaluate a
song. u Select More to display the
menu item. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193 2 Changing the Screen
Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
253* Not available on all models
254
uuPlaying Internet RadiouAhaTM Radio Menu
A u
d io
1 AhaTM Radio Menu
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that organizes your favorite web content into live radio stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio, location-based services, and audio updates from social media sites.
You can control AhaTM Radio using voice commands. 2 Aha Commands P. 417
Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio P. 398
The menu items vary depending on the station you selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the AcuraLink app must be installed on your phone. Visit owners.acura.com/apps (U.S.) or www.myacura.ca/ apps (Canada).
You must have a previously set up AhaTM account prior to using the service in your vehicle. Visit www.aharadio.com for more information.
On Canadian models, AhaTM is referred to as Streams. Visit acura.ca/owners/acuralink/streams for more information.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 254
AhaTM Radio Menu
Rotate to select an item. Press .
u Press the MENU button to display the menu items.
Select or to skip contents. Select to pause or play a
song. Select an icon to evaluate a song. Select More to display the menu
item. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193 2 Changing the Screen Settings
P. 89
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying Internet RadiouAhaTM Radio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 255
H MENU button (in AhaTM mode) u Station List
Rotate to select a station form the Station list. Press .
How to Select a Station from the Station List
255
256
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 256
Playing a USB Flash Drive
1 Connecting a USB Flash Drive
We recommend connecting the USB flash drive with the USB adapter cable.
Do not connect your USB flash drive using a hub. Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disc drive, as the device or your tracks may be damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using the device in your vehicle.
1 USB Flash Drives
Digital music tracks, such as MP3, WMA, AAC, etc., in USB flash drives cannot be copied to HDD. Likewise, digital music tracks recorded to HDD cannot be copied to USB flash drives.
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.
1. Open the USB cover. 2. Install the USB flash drive to the USB port.
A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
Connecting a USB Flash Drive
USB Flash Drives
uuPlaying a USB Flash DriveuSelecting USB Mode A
u d
io
1 Selecting USB Mode
You can control a USB flash drive using voice commands.
2 USB Commands P. 417
Files in WMA/ACC format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 394
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 257
Selecting USB Mode
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port in the console compartment. 2. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 3. Rotate to select Change Source. Press . 4. Rotate to select USB. Press .
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port in the console compartment. 2. Select Source. 3. Select the USB icon.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
257
258
uuPlaying a USB Flash DriveuAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
1 Audio Screen Control
Random: Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat: Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Scan: Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 258
Audio Screen Control Control the audio system through the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
1. Rotate or press to display the song list.
2. Rotate or move or to select a song from the list. Press
. u Press the MENU button to
display the menu items. 2 Audio Menu P. 259
1. Select to skip to the next folder, and to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.
2. Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a file. u Select More to display the
menu item. 2 Audio Menu P. 259
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying a USB Flash DriveuAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 259
Audio Menu H MENU button (in USB mode)
Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Music Search: Selects a file from the Music Search list. 2 How to Select a File from the Music Search List P. 261
Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Scan:
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder.
Random/Repeat: Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Interface Dial
259Continued
260
uuPlaying a USB Flash DriveuAudio Menu
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 260
1. Select More. 2. Select a setting item.
The following items are available: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Screen Settings: Displays the screen preferences screen. 2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying a USB Flash DriveuAudio Menu A
u d
io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 261
H MENU button (in USB mode) u Music Search
1. Move or to select a search category. Press .
2. Rotate to select a file from the Music Search list. Press .
How to Select a File from the Music Search List
261
262
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 262
Playing Bluetooth Audio
1 Playing Bluetooth Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones, call 1-888-528-7876 or visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink (U.S.) or www.handsfreelink.ca (Canada).
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth Audio using voice commands.
2 Bluetooth Audio Commands P. 417
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 266
Selecting Bluetooth Audio Mode
1. Make sure that your phone is on, paired, and linked to HFL. 2 Pairing a Phone P. 269
2. Press the MENU button. (in AUDIO mode) 3. Rotate to select Change Source. Press . 4. Rotate to select Bluetooth Audio. Press .
1. Make sure that your phone is on, paired, and linked to HFL. 2 Pairing a Phone P. 269
2. Select Source. 3. Select the Bluetooth icon.
Interface Dial
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
uuPlaying Bluetooth AudiouAudio Screen Control A
u d
io
1 Audio Screen Control
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.
The pause function and Music Search may not be available on some phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. This function may not be available on some phones.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 263
Audio Screen Control Control the audio system through the audio/information screen and On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
1. Press the MENU button. (in BT mode).
2. Rotate to select an item. Press .
The following items are available: Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Music Search: Selects a song from the Music Search list. Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Play: Plays a song. Pause: Pauses a song.
Interface Dial
263Continued
264
uuPlaying Bluetooth AudiouAudio Screen Control
A u
d io
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 264
1. Select or to change folders. 2. Select or to change files.
u Select More to display the menu items, then select a setting item.
u Select or to play or pause a song file.
The following items are available: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Screen Settings: Displays the screen preferences screen. 2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 265
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
This section describes how to operate Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. You can place and
receive phone calls using your vehicles audio system without handling your cell phone.
65
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ..................266 Using HFL .............................................266 Pairing a Phone.....................................269 Importing Phonebook Data ...................275 Setting Up Speed Dialing ......................276 Phonebook Phonetic Modification.........282 Phone Settings......................................287 Making a Call .......................................292 Receiving a Call.....................................298 Options During a Call............................299
2
Text/E-mail Message ............................ 300 Setting a Text/E-mail Message .............. 300 Selecting a Mail Account...................... 301 Receiving a Text/E-mail Message .......... 302 Displaying Messages ............................ 303
Roadside Assistance ............................. 307 HFL Menus ............................................. 308
266
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 266
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
1 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible mobile phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: Call 1-888-528-7876 or visit www.acura.com/ handsfreelink (U.S.) or www.handsfreelink.ca (Canada).
Voice control tips: Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
Press and release the (Talk) button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag, a phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level, use the audio systems volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation an after ending the call.
If you press (Talk) button, the climate control fan speed is reduced automatically. When voice recognition ends, the fan speed returns to the previous level.
Using HFL
(Pick-Up) button: Press to go to the Speed Dial/Call History on the multi- information display or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-Up/Back) button: Press to end a call, or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Interface dial: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . Move ,
, or to select secondary menu.
HFL Buttons
Volume up (Pick-Up) button
(Hang-Up/Back) button
(Talk) button
Microphone
PHONE Button
Interface Dial
Volume down
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
Bluetooth Wireless Technology The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended. Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicles navigation system, without handling your mobile phone.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 267
The audio/information screen notifies you when you have an incoming call.
HFL Status Display
Bluetooth Indicator Comes on when your phone is connected to HFL.
Callers Name
Callers Number
Battery Level Status
Roam Status
Signal Strength
Continued 267
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuUsing HFL
268
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish.
2 Language Settings P. 36
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 268
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Setting Up Speed Dialing P. 276
Limitations for Manual Operation
Disabled Option
U.S. models
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPairing a Phone B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Pairing a Phone
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips: You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving. Up to six phones can be paired. Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL. If your phone is not ready for pairing or is not
found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side.
These icons indicate the following: : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth
Audio.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 269
Pairing a Phone H PHONE button
When no Bluetooth-compatible phone is paired, the following screen appears: 1. Rotate to select Yes. Press . 2. Make sure your phone is in search
or discoverable mode. Press . u HFL automatically searches for
a Bluetooth device.
3. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear,
you can select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move to select Device Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
269Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPairing a Phone
270
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Pairing a Phone
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call history and phonebook automatically imported to HFL.
2 Automatic Phone Sync Setting P. 291
Some phones may have an additional setting to allow the phone to auto connect each time you turn on your vehicle.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 270
4. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on
the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
5. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Connect Phone
1. Rotate to select Add Bluetooth Device.
2. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode. Press . u HFL automatically searches for
a Bluetooth device.
Pairing from Phone Setup
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPairing a Phone B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 271
3. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone does not appear,
you can select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move to select Device Not Found? and search for Bluetooth devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink.
4. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on
the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
5. You will receive a notification on the screen if pairing is successful.
271Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPairing a Phone
272
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Changing the Pairing Code
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 272
H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Edit Pairing Code
Rotate to select Fixed or Random. Press .
Changing the Pairing Code
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPairing a Phone B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Changing the Currently Paired Phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial entries, and security PIN information from the previously paired phone.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 273
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Bluetooth Device List
1. Rotate to select a paired phone you want to replace. Press
. 2. Rotate to select Replace This
Device. Press . 3. HFL enters the pairing process and
searches a new phone. u Follow the prompts to pair a
new phone. 4. You will receive a notification on
the screen if pairing is successful.
Changing the Currently Paired Phone
Continued 273
274
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPairing a Phone
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 274
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Bluetooth Device List
1. Rotate to select a paired phone you want to replace. Press
. 2. Rotate to select Delete This
Device. Press .
3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes. Press . 4. You will receive a notification on
the screen if deletion is successful.
Deleting a Paired Phone
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuImporting Phonebook Data B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Importing Phonebook Data
When you select a person from the list in the mobile phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work
Fax
Car
Other
Pager
Message
Voice
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 275
Importing Phonebook Data When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.
275
276
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuSetting Up Speed Dialing
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Setting Up Speed Dialing
When a voice tag is stored, press the (Talk) button to call the number using the voice tag. Say Call and the voice tag name.
Voice tags allow you to call speed dial entries from the Voice Portal screen or Phone call screen by saying the voice tag name.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 276
Setting Up Speed Dialing H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. 1. Rotate to select New Entry.
Press .
2. Rotate to select a number entry method. Press .
The following options are available: Import from Call History: Select a number from the call history. Manual Input: Input the number manually. Import from Phonebook: Select a number from the linked mobile phone's
imported phonebook.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuSetting Up Speed Dialing B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Registering a Voice Tag to a Speed Dial Entry
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using home as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use John Smith instead of John.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 277
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Edit Speed Dial
1. Select an existing speed dial entry. 2. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Edit. Press . 3. Rotate to select Voice Tag.
Press . 4. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Record. Press .
5. Press . u Using the (Talk) button,
follow the prompt to enter a voice tag.
Registering a Voice Tag to a Speed Dial Entry
Continued 277
278
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuSetting Up Speed Dialing
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 278
To delete a voice tag 1. Select an existing speed dial entry. 2. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Edit. Press . 3. Rotate to select Voice Tag.
Press . 4. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Clear. Press . 5. You will receive a confirmation
message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes. Press .
To delete a speed dial 1. Select an existing speed dial entry. 2. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Delete. Press . 3. You will receive a confirmation
message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes. Press .
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuSetting Up Speed Dialing B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Setting Phone Shortcuts
Dial icon You can make a call using the keyboard on the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM to input numbers.
2 Entering a Phone Number P. 294
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 279
You can preset five previously stored speed dial entries, and make a call from one of the preset numbers, or call history when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system.
2 Setting Up Speed Dialing P. 276
To preset a speed dial 1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Speed Dial. 4. Select Edit or No Entry.
u If you select No Entry, go to step 6.
5. Select Add and select a preset number you want to store as a shortcut. u Five presets appear. Select a No
Entry preset or an existing preset.
u The screen changes to a list of previously stored speed dial entries.
Setting Phone Shortcuts
Continued 279
280
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuSetting Up Speed Dialing
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 280
6. Select a phone number you want to store as a shortcut. Select OK and press .
To make a call from a speed dial entry 1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Speed Dial. 4. Select a preset number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuSetting Up Speed Dialing B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 To make a call from call history
The call history displays the last six dialed, received, or missed calls.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 281
To delete a speed dial 1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Speed Dial. 4. Select Edit. 5. Select Delete. 6. Select the preset number with the
phone number you want to delete.
To make a call from call history 1. Select Shortcuts. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Call History. 4. Select a phone number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
281
282
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhonebook Phonetic Modification
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 282
Phonebook Phonetic Modification H SETTINGS button u System Settings u Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone's contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
To add a new voice tag 1. Rotate to select the phone
you want to add phonetic modification to. Press .
2. Rotate to select New Voice Tag. Press .
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhonebook Phonetic Modification B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 283
3. Move or and Rotate to select a contact name. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen.
4. Rotate to select Modify. Press .
5. Using the (Talk) button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
6. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select OK. Press . 7. The screen returns to the New
Voice Tag screen. Move and rotate to select OK. Press .
283Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhonebook Phonetic Modification
284
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Phonebook Phonetic Modification
You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 284
To modify a voice tag 1. Rotate to select the phone
you want to add phonetic modification to. Press .
2. Rotate to select a contact name you want to modify. Press
. u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen.
3. Rotate to select Modify. Press .
4. Using the (Talk) button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag.
5. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select OK. Press .
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhonebook Phonetic Modification B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 285
To delete a modified voice tag 1. Rotate to select the phone for
which you want to delete phonetic modification. Press .
2. Rotate to select a contact name you want to delete. Press
. u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen.
3. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u Items to be deleted are
indicated with a trash icon.
4. Move and Rotate to select OK. Press .
Trash icon
285Continued
286
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhonebook Phonetic Modification
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 286
To delete all modified voice tags 1. Rotate to select the phone
you want to delete phonetic modification. Press . u The contact name list appears.
2. Move and Rotate to select Delete All. Press .
3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select OK. Press .
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhone Settings B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Editing a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you need to enter the current security PIN before clearing the PIN or creating a new one.
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand Multi- Use DisplayTM to input numbers. Select numbers, then OK.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 287
Phone Settings Set HFL options and features.
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Bluetooth Device List
You can protect each of the six mobile phones with a security PIN. 1. Rotate to select the phone
you want to add a security PIN to. Press .
2. Rotate to select Edit PIN. Press .
3. Enter a new four-digit number. Rotate to select OK to enter the security PIN. u Move to delete.
4. Re-enter the four-digit number. u The screen returns to the screen
in step 4.
Editing a Security PIN
287Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhone Settings
288
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Editing User Name
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand Multi- Use DisplayTM to input letters and numbers.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 288
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Bluetooth Device List
Edit the user name of a paired phone as follows: 1. Rotate to select a phone you
want to edit. Press . 2. Rotate to select Edit Device
Name. Press .
3. Enter a new name of the phone. u Rotate or move to select
OK to enter the name. Press .
u Move to delete.
Editing User Name
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhone Settings B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 289
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Auto Transfer
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
Rotate to select On. Press .
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds. Rotate to select On. Press .
Automatic Transferring
Auto Answer
289Continued
290
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhone Settings
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 290
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting. Rotate to select your desired setting item. Press .
The following items are available: Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker. Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the ring tone stored in the phone
sounds from the speakers. Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
Ring Tone
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuPhone Settings B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Automatic Phone Sync Setting
Select On if you want your call history and phonebook automatically imported to HFL. If prompted by your phone, please accept the import request. Not all phones require this additional step.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 291
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Automatic Phone Sync
Rotate to select On or Off. Press .
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Use Contact Photo
You can display a caller's picture on an incoming call screen. Rotate to select On. Press .
Automatic Phone Sync Setting
Use Contact Photo
291
292
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuMaking a Call
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name, or number can be dialed by voice from most screens. Press the (Talk) button and say Call and the voice tag name, Call by name and the phonebook name, or Call and the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 ft (10 m).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 292
Making a Call You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuMaking a Call B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Using the Phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 268 2 Setting Up Speed Dialing P. 276
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand Multi- Use DisplayTM for an alphabetical search.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 293
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Phonebook
1. The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Move to Search. u You can use the keyboard on
the touchscreen for an alphabetical search.
2. Rotate to select a number. Press . u Dialing starts automatically.
Using the Phonebook
Continued 293
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuMaking a Call
294
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Entering a Phone Number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number, phonebook name, or number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 268 2 Setting Up Speed Dialing P. 276
You can use the keyboard on the On Demand Multi- Use DisplayTM to input numbers. Select numbers, then
to start dialing.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 294
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Dial
1. Rotate to select a number. Press .
2. Rotate to select . Press .
Entering a Phone Number
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuMaking a Call B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 295
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Redial
You can display a caller's picture on an incoming call screen. Rotate to select Dial. Press . u Dialing starts automatically.
Using Redial
295Continued
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuMaking a Call
296
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Using Call History
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
These icons next to the number indicate the following: : Dialed calls : Received calls : Missed calls
The call history displays the last 12 dialed, received, or missed calls.
Multi-information Display
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 296
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed.
1. Move or to select All, Dialed, Received, and Missed.
2. Rotate to select a number. Press . u Dialing starts automatically.
1. Press the button. 2. Move the left selector wheel right
to select Call History. 3. Roll the left selector wheel to
select a number. 4. Push the left selector wheel or the
button. u Dialing starts automatically.
Using Call History
Audio/Information Screen
Multi-information Display
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuMaking a Call B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Using Speed Dial
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another paired phone's speed dial list. You can make a call from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the (Talk) button to call the number using the voice tag.
2 Setting Up Speed Dialing P. 276
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name or number can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the (Talk) button and follow the prompts.
The speed dial displays the 20 speed dial entries. Multi-information Display
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 297
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Speed Dial
Rotate to select a number. Press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
1. Press the button. 2. Move the left selector wheel left to
select Speed Dial. 3. Roll the left selector wheel to
select a number. 4. Push the left selector wheel or the
button. u Dialing starts automatically.
Using Speed Dial
Audio/Information Screen
Multi-information Display
297
298
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuReceiving a Call
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Receiving a Call
Call Waiting Press the (Pick-Up) button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the (Pick-Up) button again to return to the current call. Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the (Hang-Up/Back) button if you want to hang up the current call. You can select the icons on the On Demand Multi- Use DisplayTM instead of the (Pick-Up) and (Hang-Up/Back) buttons.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 298
Receiving a Call When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears.
1. Press the (Pick-Up) button to answer the call.
2. Press the (Hang-Up/Back) button to decline or end the call.
uuBluetooth HandsFreeLinkuOptions During a Call B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the On Demand Multi- Use DisplayTM.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 299
Options During a Call The available options are shown on the Phone screen.
Rotate to select the option. Press .
u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
The following options are available during a call: Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-
driven phone system.
299
300
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 300
Text/E-mail Message
1 Text/E-mail Message
Some text/e-mail features may not be available depending on a mobile phone.
Setting a Text/E-mail Message
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Enable Text/Email
Rotate to select On or Off. Press .
H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u New Text/Email Alert
Rotate to select On or Off. Press .
The following items are available: On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new text message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification.
To Turn On or Off the Text/E-mail Function
To Turn On or Off the Text/E-mail Notice
uuText/E-mail MessageuSelecting a Mail Account B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list screen or the message list screen. Move to select Select Account, then press .
You can only receive notifications from one text message or mail account at a time.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 301
Selecting a Mail Account H SETTINGS button u Phone Settings u Select Account
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to be active and receive notifications.
Rotate to Text Messages or an e-mail account you want. Press .
301
302
uuText/E-mail MessageuReceiving a Text/E-mail Message
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text and e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/ e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely.
When you receive a text or e-mail message for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To Turn On or Off the Text/E-mail Notice P. 300
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 302
Receiving a Text/E-mail Message HFL can display newly received text and e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked mobile phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text or e-mail message.
2. Rotate to select Read to listen to the message. Press . u The text or e-mail message is
displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read- out. Press .
uuText/E-mail MessageuDisplaying Messages B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phones outbox.
To see the previous or next message, move or on the text message screen.
Some phones may have an additional setting to enable this feature.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 303
Displaying Messages
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Text/Email
1. Select account if necessary. 2. Rotate to select a message.
Press . u The text message is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Displaying Text Messages
303Continued
uuText/E-mail MessageuDisplaying Messages
304
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Displaying E-mail Messages
Received text and e-mail messages may appear in the message list screen at the same time. In this case, text messages are titled No subject.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 304
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Text/Email
1. Rotate to select a folder. Press .
2. Rotate to select a message. Press . u The text message is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
Displaying E-mail Messages
uuText/E-mail MessageuDisplaying Messages B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 305
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts
reading the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 303
2. Press to stop reading. Press again to start reading the message from the beginning.
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen. u The system automatically starts
reading the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 303
2. Move and Rotate to select Reply. Press .
Read or Stop Reading a Message
Reply to a Message
305Continued
uuText/E-mail MessageuDisplaying Messages
306
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Reply to a Message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows: Talk to you later, Im driving. Im on my way. Im running late. OK Yes No You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones: U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1-
888-528-7876. Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 306
3. Rotate to select the reply message. Press . u The pop-up menu appears on
the screen. 4. Select Send to send the message.
u Message Sent appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent.
1. Go to the text message screen. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud.
2 Displaying Text Messages P. 303
2. Move and Rotate to select Call. Press .
Calling the Sender
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 307
Roadside Assistance
an d
sFreeLin k
1 Roadside Assistance
If you are subscribed to a paid AcuraLink package, you can call the roadside assistance using the LINK button instead of your phone.
2 AcuraLink P. 314
This function is not available on all models.
H MENU button (on Phone screen) u Roadside Assistance
Provides a nationwide service for unexpected incidents. You can call for assistance using a phone paired and connected to Bluetooth HandsFreeLink.
Rotate to select a phone number. Press . u Dialing starts automatically.
307
308
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 308
HFL Menus
1 HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth- compatible mobile phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
Edit Device Name
Edit PIN
Replace This Device
Delete This Device
Edit the user name of a paired phone.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone. Replace a previously paired phone with a new phone. Delete a previously paired phone.
ne to the system.
o the system.
aired phone from the system.
o the system.
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
Phone settings screen 1. Press the SETTINGS button. 2. Rotate to select Phone
Settings, then press .
Phone Connect phone
Bluetooth Device List
Add Bluetooth Device
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Add Bluetooth Device
(Existing entry list)
Connect a pho
Pair a phone t
Disconnect a p
Pair a phone t
uuHFL Menusu B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
Import from Call History
Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit a previously stored speed dial number. Change a number. Create or delete a voice tag. Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Delete
our phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
the previously stored speed dial numbers.
Import from Phonebook
Edit
incoming call after about four seconds.
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
call screen.
default.
n and off.
.
the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail message.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 309
Text/ Email*1
Set calls to automatically transfer from y
Delete all
Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo
Default
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert
Ring Tone
Delete All
New Entry
(Existing entry list)
Set whether to automatically answer an
Select the ring tone.
Set phonebook data to be automatically
Display a callers picture on an incoming
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as
Turn the text/e-mail message function o
Select a text or e-mail message account
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
309Continued
310
uuHFL Menusu
B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
t a phone number from the call history to store as a speed umber.
t a phone number from the phonebook to store as a dial number.
al list.
l list.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 310
Phone screen 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Press the MENU button to display
the menu items.
Dial*1
Phonebook*1
Speed Dial*1
(Existing entry list)
More Speed Dials
Import from Call History
Enter a phone number to dial.
Display the paired phones phonebook.
EnterManual Input
Import from Phonebook
New Entry Selec dial n
Selec speed
Dial the selected number in the speed di
Display another paired phones speed dia
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
uuHFL Menusu B lu e to o th H
an d
sFreeLin k
/Stop)
vious
ext
ply
all
lect ount
sed calls.
ssistance service.
System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read.
See the previous message.
See the next message.
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
Select a mail or text message account.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 311
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. *2: Not available on all models *3: This function is not available if your phone is not supported.
Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phones history.
Call History*1
Roadside Assistance*1, 2
Text/Email*1, 3
All
Dialed
Received
Missed
(Read
Pre
N
Re
C
Se Acc
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and mis
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
Makes a call to the number for the Roadside A
Message is read aloud.
Select a message, or select a file and then a message. After that, press .
311
312
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 312
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 313
AcuraLink Messages
This section describes how Acura directly communicates important information to you
regarding your vehicle.
13
AcuraLink............................................. 314 In Case of Emergency........................... 314 Security Features .................................. 317 Operator Assistance ............................. 318 AcuraLink Message ............................ 319 AcuraLink Subscription Status............. 324
314
A cu
raLin k M
essag es
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 314
AcuraLink
1 AcuraLink
AcuraLink also provides services you can operate from the Internet or your smartphone.
To subscribe to AcuraLink, or to get more information about all of its features, contact an Acura dealer or visit owners.acura.com (U.S.) or www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink (Canada).
1 In Case of Emergency
You cannot operate other navigation or phone related functions using the screens while talking to the operator.
Only the operator can terminate the connection to your vehicle.
A subscription-based service that provides convenient features such as voice communication in case of emergency, online security, one-on-one operator assistance, and the transmission of important messages regarding your vehicles status.
For information on traffic rerouting and traffic information updates, provided by the AcuraLink server.
In Case of Emergency Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use emergency services when: You travel outside the AcuraLink service coverage areas. There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the ASSIST button,
microphone, speakers, or the unit itself. You are not subscribed to the service or your subscription is no longer valid.
Canadian models
uuAcuraLinku In Case of Emergency A
cu raLin
k M
essag es
1 Automatic Collision Notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 315
If your vehicles airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle will automatically attempt to connect to the AcuraLink operator. Once connected, information about your vehicle, its positioning, and its condition will be sent to the operator; you also can speak to the operator when connected.
Automatic Collision Notification Audio/Information Screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Continued 315
uuAcuraLinku In Case of Emergency
316
A cu
raLin k M
essag es
1 Manual Operator Connection
Do not press the button while driving. When you need to contact the operator, park the vehicle in a safe place.
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it automatically cancels the action after three minutes.
In an emergency, the cover can be broken through to press the ASSIST button.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 316
If you need to talk to the AcuraLink operator in an emergency situation, you can manually connect to them by pressing the ASSIST button with the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON. 1. Open the cover attached to the
ceiling console. 2. Press the ASSIST button.
u You are connected to the AcuraLink operator.
Manual Operator Connection
ASSIST Button
uuAcuraLinkuSecurity Features A
cu raLin
k M
essag es
1 Security Features
The contact information of your provider, your user ID and PIN will be given when you subscribe to AcuraLink. If you forget any of the above, contact a dealer or visit owners.acura.com (U.S.) or www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink (Canada).
You can also activate the remote door lock/unlock and vehicle finder features from the Internet or using your smartphone app. Ask a dealer or visit owners.acura.com (U.S.) or www.acura.ca/owners/ acuralink (Canada).
1 Vehicle finder
The lights will stop flashing and horn will stop sounding under the following conditions: When 30 seconds have elapsed. You unlock the doors using the remote transmitter. You unlock the doors using the keyless access
system. You unlock the doors using the built-in key. The power mode is set to ACCESSORY or ON.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 317
Security Features Your subscribed telematics service provider can track your vehicles location, remotely lock or unlock doors, and help you find your vehicle. To use these features, you need your user ID and personal identification number (PIN).
Stolen vehicle tracking This feature searches and tracks down your vehicle position even if it is on the move. If you believe that your vehicle has been stolen, contact the police as well as the provider.
Remote door lock/unlock The provider can remotely lock or unlock doors upon your request.
Vehicle finder This feature is convenient to use when trying to locate your vehicle in large areas, such as a crowded parking lot. If you cannot locate your vehicle after using the remote transmitters answerback function, you can contact the provider which can then flash your vehicles exterior lights and sound the horn.
Security alarm notification If the security system in your vehicle detects an abnormal condition, such as someone tampering with the lock on your vehicle, the provider notifies you by your preferred method.
317
318
uuAcuraLinkuOperator Assistance
A cu
raLin k M
essag es
1 Operator Assistance
Remain attentive to road conditions and driving during operator assistance.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 318
Operator Assistance Connect to the AcuraLink operator when trying to find a destination or for roadside assistance.
1. Press the LINK button. u Connection to the operator
begins.
2. Talk to the operator. u To disconnect, rotate to
select Hang Up, select End Call on the On Demand Multi- Use DisplayTM, or press the (Hang-Up/Back) button on the steering wheel.
LINK Button
uuAcuraLinkuAcuraLink Message A
cu raLin
k M
essag es
1 AcuraLink Message
Messages may not appear immediately after your vehicle purchase. It can take several days for your dealer to register your vehicles ID.
If an icon includes an exclamation point, it indicates that Acura gives high priority to this message compared to the one without. : An unread message with high priority : An unread message
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 319
AcuraLink Message
AcuraLink sends you messages on vehicle features, safety and emissions recall campaigns, maintenance reminders, and diagnostic information. When you receive a new message, an icon appears on the upper right corner of the audio/information screen.
Message Icon
319Continued
uuAcuraLinkuAcuraLink Message
320
A cu
raLin k M
essag es
1 Message Category
The types of messages you receive can be modified. Ask a dealer or visit owners.acura.com (U.S.) or www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink (Canada).
You can call your dealer, find the nearest dealer, or schedule appointments from the message options in Maintenance Minder, Recalls/Campaigns, and Diagnostic Info.
2 Message Options P. 322
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 320
There are six message categories. Feature Guide: Messages about your vehicle and its features are sent daily for
the first 90 days. Quick Tips: Supplements your Owners Manual with updated vehicle
information. Scheduled Dealer Appointment: An appointment made through the Acura
server or Acura Owners website can be rescheduled or canceled from this option. 2 Dealer Appointments (U.S. only) P. 323
Diagnostic Info: Appears when a warning indicator or message comes on. Rotate to select Check Later or Check Now. u Selecting Check Now lets you know if you should see a dealer immediately or
later in accordance with the warning severity level. Maintenance Minder: Lets you know which maintenance item is due along
with a reminder message. Recalls/Campaigns: Reminds you of a recall or important safety information.
You should also be notified by mail.
Message Category
uuAcuraLinkuAcuraLink Message A
cu raLin
k M
essag es
1 Reading a Message
If there is no message listed on the menu, AcuraLink/Messages is grayed out and cannot be selected.
The message icon disappears once you read the message.
However, the exclamation mark that indicates that the message has a high priority remains. : A read message with high priority.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 321
1. Press the INFO button, rotate to select AcuraLink/Messages, then press . u If your display has changed
from Info menu to Current Drive, press the MENU button.
u Select AcuraLink messages. 2. Rotate to select a category,
then press . u If there are unread messages in
a category, a message icon appears next to that category.
3. Rotate to select a message you want to read, then press .
Reading a Message
Continued 321
uuAcuraLinkuAcuraLink Message
322
A cu
raLin k M
essag es
1 Message Options
The available options vary by message category.
You can delete all messages in a category at once.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 322
While a message is displayed, you can use options to take immediate action regarding the message.
Available options are: Voice: Reads the message aloud. Select Stop to cancel it. Find Acura Dlr.: Searches for the nearest Acura dealer. Delete: Deletes the displayed message. Call Your Dealer: Calls your Acura dealer using HFL. Schedule Dealer Appointment (U.S. only): Automatically sets an appointment
date at your dealer. Phone number: Dials a number displayed in the message via HFL. Diagnostic Info: Updates the current diagnostic message by connecting to the
Acura server using HFL.
Message Options
uuAcuraLinkuAcuraLink Message A
cu raLin
k M
essag es
1 Dealer Appointments (U.S. only)
To set up an automated dealer appointment when a regular maintenance is due, visit the Acura Owners website at owners.acura.com (U.S.) or www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink (Canada) and set the required option. A reminder message will be sent as the date for the dealer appointment approaches. A reminder message will also be sent if you schedule an appointment online using the Schedule Service Appointment function.
If you are not satisfied with the proposed appointment date and time, call your dealer directly.
To cancel the scheduled appointment, select Cancel Appointment when a message is displayed.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 323
You can confirm the scheduled appointment date when you receive a Maintenance Minder or Recalls/Campaigns message, or reschedule any existing appointments.
1. Select a Maintenance Minder, Recalls/Campaigns, or Scheduled Dealer Appointment message.
2. Rotate to select Scheduled Dealer Appointment or Reschedule Appointment (depending on the screen). Press
. u A suggested time and date are
displayed. 3. Rotate to select Confirm
Appointment. Press to accept the time and date.
4. Press to select OK.
Dealer Appointments (U.S. only)
323
324
uuAcuraLinkuAcuraLink Subscription Status
A cu
raLin k M
essag es
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 324
AcuraLink Subscription Status H SETTINGS button u Info Settings u AcuraLink Subscription Status
Confirm your AcuraLink subscription status.
Signal strength
Item Information
You can check the signal strength.
Current Contract The AcuraLink subscription number and subscription level is displayed.
Service You can confirm the type of service.
Subscription You can confirm the expiration date.
Status The following message can be displayed: Check Antenna: There is a problem with the AcuraLink
antenna. Contact a dealer. No data: The signal is received, but some error has occurred
in the system. OK: The system is receiving the signal or traffic data*.
* Not available on all models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 325
Rear Entertainment System*
Rear seat passengers can enjoy a completely separate entertainment source than front
passengers, including movies, games, and other audio choices.
25
Rear Entertainment System ..................326 Auxiliary Console Panel .........................326 HDMI Input Jack..................................327 Playable Discs........................................328
Rear Control Panel Operation...............329 Selecting the Audio Source ...................329 Rear DVD Menu....................................330 Screen and Surround Settings ...............333 Dual Screen Mode ................................335 Replacing the Batteries..........................337
3
Front Control Panel Operation ............ 338 Selecting the Audio Source using front control panel...................................... 338
Rear System Setup ............................... 339 Setting the DVD Menu ......................... 340
Wireless Headphones ........................... 342 Using the Wireless Headphones ........... 342 Changing the Sound Source................. 343 Replacing the Batteries ......................... 344
326
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 326
Rear Entertainment System
1 Rear Entertainment System
NOTICE This vehicles overhead mounted video display, if so equipped, includes mercury-containing components. Upon removal, please reuse, recycle, or dispose as hazardous waste.
The Rear Entertainment System (RES) is operable from both the front control panel and the rear control panel.
2 Front Control Panel Operation P. 338 2 Rear Control Panel Operation P. 329
Auxiliary Console Panel Auxiliary input jacks and headphone connectors for the rear entertainment system are on the back of the center console compartment.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
Auxiliary Input Jacks The system will accept auxiliary inputs from standard video games and video equipment. Some video game power supplies may cause poor picture quality.
Headphone Connectors There are two headphone connectors for the rear passengers. Each connector has its own volume control.
Auxiliary Input Jack
uuRear Entertainment SystemuHDMI Input Jack R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
1 HDMI Input Jack
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 327
HDMI Input Jack There is an HDMI input jack on the back of the center console compartment. The system will accept HDMI input from video games and video equipment which are equipped with an HDMI jack.
Open the outlet cover and insert the cable.
327
328
uuRear Entertainment SystemuPlayable Discs
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
1 Playable Discs
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround and Neural Surround are trademarks of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 328
Playable Discs The discs that come with these labels can be played in your vehicles rear entertainment system.
Also look for the region code of 1 or ALL on the package or jacket on the disc.
DVD-ROMs are not playable in this unit.
The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
Also includes:
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 329
Rear Control Panel Operation
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
1 Rear Control Panel Operation
In the procedures of this section, select means the following actions:
The rear control panel can be detached from the ceiling unit and used as a remote control.
2 Overhead Screen and Rear Control Panel P. 16
The screen is displayed on the overhead screen.
Rotate the Interface Dial on the rear control panel.
Selecting the Audio Source 1. Press the REAR (Power) button
on the front control panel. 2. Press the SOURCE button on the
rear control panel. 3. Select the audio source. Press the
ENTER button. u You can also change the audio
source by the front control panel.
2 Selecting the Audio Source using front control panel P. 338
4. Select a station, channel, track, or chapter using the CH/FOLDER, TUNE/SKIP, or CATEGORY bars.
329
330
uuRear Control Panel OperationuRear DVD Menu
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 330
Rear DVD Menu H MENU button (in the DVD mode)
Select an item. Press the ENTER button.
The following items are available: Top Menu: Displays the top menu of the DVD. Menu: Displays the menu of the DVD. Play Mode: Displays while a DVD is playing and changes the DVDs audio,
subtitle, or angle settings. 2 Setting the Play Mode P. 331
Search/NumInput: Skips to a title or chapter by entering the number. 2 Searching a Title/Chapter P. 332
Repeat:
TITLE REPEAT: Repeats the current title. CHAPTER REPEAT: Repeats the current chapter.
Pause/Play: Pauses or resume the playback Stop: Stops the playback. Return: Hides the rear audio menu.
uuRear Control Panel OperationuRear DVD Menu R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 331
H MENU button (in the DVD mode) u Play Mode
1. Select an item. Press the ENTER button.
2. Select an option. Press the ENTER button.
The following items are available: Audio: Selects the language of the DVD audio. Subtitle: Selects the language of the DVD subtitle. Angle: Selects the angle of a scene shot with multiple cameras.
Setting the Play Mode
331Continued
332
uuRear Control Panel OperationuRear DVD Menu
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 332
H MENU button (in the DVD mode) u Search/NumInput
1. Select an item. Press the ENTER button.
2. Select a number. Press the ENTER button.
The following items are available: Title: Skips to a title you specify. Chapter: Skips to a chapter you specify. NumInput: Enters a number of a title or chapter to skip.
Enter a number and press the ENTER button. Select DONE.
Searching a Title/Chapter
uuRear Control Panel OperationuScreen and Surround Settings R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 333
Screen and Surround Settings H SETUP button (in the DVD mode)
Select an item. Press the ENTER button.
The following items are available: Brightness: Adjusts the screens brightness. Adjust the brightness using the
Interface Dial and press the ENTER button. Appearance: Selects the color of the rear menu screen. Display Adjust: Adjusts the screens preferences.
2 Adjusting the Screen P. 334
Aspect Ratio: Selects an aspect ratio of the image. 2 Setting the Aspect Ratio P. 335
PERSONAL SURROUND: Sets the surround of the wireless headphones. You can choose from three options: Music, Cinema, or Voice. Select Off to disable the feature.
Language: Sets the system language used on all screens. You can choose from three languages: English, Franais (French), or Espaol (Spanish).
333Continued
334
uuRear Control Panel OperationuScreen and Surround Settings
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 334
H SETUP button (in the DVD mode) u Display Adjust
1. Select an item. Press the ENTER button.
2. Make the adjustment. Press the ENTER button.
The following items are available: Contrast: Adjusts the screens contrast. Black Level: Adjusts the screens black level. Color: Adjusts the screens color strength. Tint: Adjusts the screens hue. Reset: Resets all the settings to their factory default.
Adjusting the Screen
uuRear Control Panel OperationuDual Screen Mode R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 335
H MENU button (in the DVD mode) u Aspect Ratio
1. Select an item. Press the ENTER button.
2. Select an item. Press the ENTER button.
The following items are available: Wide: Selects the wide screen option (Normal, Full, Super Full, Ultra Full). Zoom: Selects the zoom screen option (Super Zoom, Ultra Zoom).
Dual Screen Mode Select between the two screen modes, single or dual.
Single Mode The selected source is displayed in the center of the screen.
Dual Mode Two separate screens are displayed side by side. You can only select one output source from the front audio system. The other source must come from REAR AUX Video or REAR AUX HDMI.
Setting the Aspect Ratio
335Continued
336
uuRear Control Panel OperationuDual Screen Mode
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 336
Single mode to Dual mode
Dual mode to Single mode
DVD
Press the DUAL button.
Select the side (e.g., Left).
Select a source (e.g., REAR AUX Video).
REAR AUX Video DVD
Press the SWAP button.
DVD REAR AUX Video
REAR AUX Video DVD
Press the SINGLE button.
Select a source (e.g., DVD).
DVD
uuRear Control Panel OperationuReplacing the Batteries R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
1 Replacing the Batteries
An improperly disposed battery may harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 337
Replacing the Batteries 1. Remove the rear control panel.
2 Overhead Screen and Rear Control Panel P. 16
2. Open the cover. 3. Change the batteries.
u Battery type: BR3032
Cover
337
338
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 338
Front Control Panel Operation
Operate the Rear Entertainment System (RES) from the front control panel.
Selecting the Audio Source using front control panel 1. Press the REAR (Power) button
on the front control panel. 2. Press the REAR AUDIO button.
u The rear source is displayed on the front audio/information screen and the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
u The rear source is heard from the front speakers.
3. Select Rear Source on the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
4. Select the audio source icon on the On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM.
5. Select a station, channel, track, or chapter in the same way as the front audio system.
2 Audio P. 181
uuFront Control Panel OperationuRear System Setup R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 339
Rear System Setup H SETTINGS button u Rear Ent Settings
1. Rotate to select an item. Press .
2. Rotate to select an option. Press .
The following items are available: Source Select Popup: Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources comes
on when the AUDIO button is pressed. Rear Control: Sets whether to use the rear control panel to control the RES.
On (factory default): Operates the RES using the rear control panel. Off: Disables the feature.
Rear Speaker: Sets the front audio source to play through the rear speakers, even when the RES is on. The RES source can only be heard through the wireless headphones. On (factory default): Outputs the sound of the front source to the rear speakers. Off: Disables the feature.
Single/Dual Screen Mode: Selects a source to continue playing when you switch from dual mode to single mode on the overhead screen. Rotate to select a source and press .
339
340
uuFront Control Panel OperationuSetting the DVD Menu
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 340
Setting the DVD Menu
H MENU button (in DVD mode)
1. Rotate to select an item. Press .
u Select Advanced Function to display additional menu entries.
2. Rotate to select an option. Press .
The following items are available: Sound: Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Top Menu: Displays the top menu of the DVD. Menu: Displays the menu of the DVD. Repeat:
Repeat Title: Repeats the current title. Repeat Chapter: Repeats the current chapter.
Interface Dial
uuFront Control Panel OperationuSetting the DVD Menu R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 341
Change Source: Changes the audio source mode. Play/Pause: Pauses or resume the playback. Stop: Stops the playback. Audio/Subtitle: Selects the language of the DVD audio and the DVD subtitle. Angle: Selects the angle of a scene shot with multiple cameras. Return: Hides the DVD menu. Number Input: Enters a number of a title or chapter to skip. Chapter/Title Search: Skips to a title or chapter by Interface Dial.
1. Select More. 2. Select a setting item.
The following items are available: Sound: Displays the sound preferences screen.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 193
Screen Settings: Displays the screen preferences screen. 2 Changing the Screen Settings P. 89
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
341
342
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 342
Wireless Headphones
1 Using the Wireless Headphones
When you remove the headphones, the earpieces automatically pivot inward, and the headphones turn off. When not in use, store the headphones in the back pocket of either front seat.
Some state and local government agencies prohibit the use of headphones by the driver of a motor vehicle. Always obey applicable laws and regulations.
You can use wired headphones through the auxiliary input jacks.
2 Auxiliary Console Panel P. 326
Using the Wireless Headphones Audio for the Rear Entertainment System is sent to the wireless headphones that come with the system.
1. Pivot the earpieces outward.
2. Adjust the volume by turning the dial on the bottom of the right earpiece.
3. Wear the headphones correctly with the left and right earpieces on the correct sides. u L (left) and R (right) are marked
on the sides of the frame. Volume Dial
uuWireless HeadphonesuChanging the Sound Source R
ear En tertain
m en
t System *
1 Changing the Sound Source
You can switch the sound source from the setup menu if you connected a set of wired headphones.
1. Press the SETUP button on the rear control panel. 2. Select Wired Headphones. Press the ENTER
button. 3. Select Left or Right to switch the sound source.
Press the ENTER button.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 343
Changing the Sound Source
In dual screen mode, you can switch the sound source of the wireless headphones between the left and right side screens.
Slide the tab to L for the left side, or R for the right side.
Wireless Headphone
Tab
343
344
uuWireless HeadphonesuReplacing the Batteries
R ear En
tertain m
en t System
*
1 Replacing the Batteries
The battery is under the cover on the left earpiece.
An improperly disposed battery may harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.
If static is heard in the headphones, try replacing the battery.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 344
Replacing the Batteries 1. Insert a coin in the slot and twist it
slightly to pry the cover away from the earpiece.
2. Pull the cover outward, and pivot it out of the way.
3. Remove the battery. 4. Install the new battery in the
earpiece as shown in the diagram next to the battery slot. u Battery Type: AAA battery
5. Slide the cover back into place on the earpiece, then press down on the back edge to lock it in place.
Coin
Battery
Cover
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 345
Other Features
This section describes the useful functions incorporated into the navigation system.
45
Trip Computer ....................................... 346 Power Distribution Monitor................. 347 Calendar ................................................ 350 Information Functions .......................... 351
System Device Information ................... 351 Map Data Update ................................ 351 Info Screen Preference ......................... 352
Multi-View Rear Camera*..................... 353 Surround View Camera*....................... 355 Troubleshooting ................................... 377 HomeLink Universal Transceiver........ 380
346
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 346
Trip Computer
1 Trip Computer
Displays the following trip information: Instant Fuel: The current estimated instant fuel
economy. Average Fuel: The average fuel economy since
the last key cycle. 1st, 2nd, 3rd Prev.: The previous average fuel
consumption. RANGE: The estimated distance you can travel on
the fuel remaining in the tank. EV/Total Drive: Shows the EV/total drive of the
current trip.
These values are estimates only.
H INFO button u Trip Computer
View the distance traveled and average fuel consumption. Move or to select the trip information.
The following items are available: Current Drive: Displays the current trip information. History of Trip A: Displays information for three previous histories. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A. Delete History: Deletes the trip information. Move on the Trip A screen to
select Delete History, then press . You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 347
Power Distribution Monitor
th er Featu
res
1 Power Distribution Monitor
While the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the following may appear on the display.
The High Voltage battery charge level gauge shows the current High Voltage battery charge level.
High Voltage Battery Charge Level Gauge
H INFO button u Power Distribution Monitor
Consists of the audio/information display showing the vehicles power flow and torque distribution indicators.
Power flow monitor Shows motor and engine power flow, indicating what supplies power to the vehicle, or if the battery is being charged.
Power flow pattern Color of
indicators
Power is supplied by the motors and the engine.
Blue
Torque Indicator
Engine Icon
Torque Indicator
Power Flow Indicator
Engine Icon (Engine on)
Power Flow Indicator
347Continued
348
uuPower Distribution Monitoru
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 348
Power flow pattern Color of
indicators
Power is only supplied by the motors.
Blue
Power is only supplied by the engine.
Blue
The motors charge the High Voltage battery.
Green
Engine Icon (Engine off)
Power Flow Indicator
Engine Icon (Engine on)
Power Flow Indicator
Engine Icon (Engine on)
Power Flow Indicator
uuPower Distribution Monitoru O
th er Featu
res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 349
SPORT HYBRID SH-AWD torque distribution monitor The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to each wheel or regenerative energy being supplied to the High Voltage battery. See the Owners Manual for instructions.
Torque Indicator
How much regenerative braking is being supplied to the High Voltage battery is shown in four scales. The indicators appear in green.
How much torque is being transferred is shown in four scales. The indicators appear in blue.
Torque Indicator
349
350
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 350
Calendar
H INFO button u Calendar
View the calendar screen. Move or to select the months of the year.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 351
Information Functions
th er Featu
res
1 System Device Information
You will need this information when ordering a map update.
2 Obtaining a Navigation Update P. 405
1 Map Data Update
This operation is only available during a database update.
2 Obtaining a Navigation Update P. 405
System Device Information H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u System Device Information
View database, software, device, and vehicle identification information.
Map Data Update H SETTINGS button u Navi Settings u Map u Map Data Update
Check the map data update status when updating the map database.
351
352
uu Information FunctionsuInfo Screen Preference
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 352
Info Screen Preference H SETTINGS button u Info Settings u Other u Info Screen Preference
Select the top menu when the INFO button is pressed. Rotate to select your desired setting item. Press .
The following options are available: Info Top: A brief menu pops up. Info Menu (factory default): A full menu pops up. Off: A menu does not pop up.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 353
Multi-View Rear Camera*
th er Featu
res
1 Multi-View Rear Camera*
Always keep the camera lens clean and unobstructed. The multi-view rear camera has a lens that makes distances appear different than they actually are. Always take care when reversing, and look behind you for obstacles.
Navigation controls are disabled when in Reverse.
Adjusting the brightness for the multi-view rear camera display does not affect the brightness for the audio/information screen.
If you turn the guide lines off, they remain off until you turn them back on.
The last used viewing mode is selected the next time you shift into Reverse. However, once the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), WIDE mode is selected if TOP DOWN view was last used.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 90
If you select gear position out of in Top down view mode, then select again 10 seconds later, Wide view mode is selected.
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera Your vehicle is equipped with a multi-view rear camera. When you select gear position , the rear view is displayed on the audio/information screen. The edge of the bumper and parking guide lines are also displayed.
Rotate to adjust the screen brightness. While the rear view is displayed, press to switch between WIDE, NORMAL, and TOP DOWN view modes.
Multi-View Rear Camera
353Continued * Not available on all models
uuMulti-View Rear Camera*uAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
354
O th
er Featu res
1 Multi-View Rear Camera*
Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you select gear position
. Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 354
TOP DOWN
NORMAL
Guide lines
Bumper
Camera
Approx. 9.8 ft (3 m)
Approx. 1.7 ft (50 cm) Tailgate open range
WIDE Screen display
Approx. 6.6 ft (2 m)
Approx. 3.3 ft (1 m)
* Not available on all models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 355
Surround View Camera*
th er Featu
res
1 Surround View Camera*
Always keep the camera lens clean and unobstructed. The rearview camera has a lens that makes distances appear different than they actually are. Always take care when backing up, and look behind you for obstacles.
Navigation controls are disabled when in Reverse.
Adjusting the brightness for the camera display does not affect the brightness of the audio/information screen.
If you turn the guide lines off, they remain off until you turn them back on.
The Surround View Camera System is designed to reduce the driver's stress of operating the vehicle. Use this system as support for visual checks to confirm the safety in areas likely to be blind spots.
The Surround View Camera System does not eliminate all blind spots. Visually confirm safety around the vehicle with your own eyes and the mirrors. Do not rely on the camera view.
The Surround View Camera System allows the driver to check the blind spots through the images displayed on the audio/information screen.
Using this support system will reduce the driver's stress in the following situations. Backing up the vehicle into a parking space marked with parking lines. Checking both ways at intersections with poor visibility. Parallel-parking in a parking space marked with parking lines. Checking for obstacles in front of the vehicle. Checking for obstacles at the rear of the vehicle. Checking for obstacles around the front right and left sides of the vehicle.
355* Not available on all models
356
uuSurround View Camera*uCamera locations and images
O th
er Featu res
de view camera (Driver side)
Rearview
Rearview camera
Because a unique camera lens is used, objects viewed in the audio/information screen appear closer or farther than they actually are and/or distorted. The further the objects are, the more apparent this becomes.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 356
Camera locations and images Your vehicle is equipped with four cameras. They provide different views and also a synthetically combined ground view. The views appear differently during the day and at night.
Right Side view
Frontview camera
Front view
Front Blind View
Side view camera (Passenger side)
Left and Right Side view
Si
Ground view Composite image by four cameras
uuSurround View Camera*uDisplaying the Surround View Camera Screen O
th er Featu
res
1 Displaying the Surround View Camera Screen
Operating the navigation system or audio system while the Surround View Camera System screen is displayed closes the Surround View Camera System screen and starts up the navigation system screen.
1 Using the CAMERA Button
Even when the Surround View Camera System screen is displayed, the display automatically switches to the audio/information screen if the vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h), and it switches back to the multi- view camera system screen if the speed is reduced to below 7 mph (12 km/h).*1
*1: For the rear view, the screen does not automatically switch based on the vehicle speed.
0 mph (0 km/h) 9 mph (15 km/h)
Camera Screen
Camera Screen
Audio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen
0 mph (0 km/h) 7 mph (12 km/h) Down Up
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 357
Displaying the Surround View Camera Screen
Press the CAMERA button while the vehicle is stopped or running slower than 7 mph (12 km/h). u Displays the front view. To switch
the screen, press the CAMERA button. Press other mode buttons to exit the Surround View Camera System.
Using the CAMERA Button
CAMERA button
357Continued
uuSurround View Camera*uDisplaying the Surround View Camera Screen
358
O th
er Featu res
1 Using the CAMERA Button
When the vehicle is decelerating rapidly, it may appear before it reaches 7 mph (12 km/h). If you press the CAMERA button while the vehicle speed is more than 7 mph (12 km/h), a message screen appears. When the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h), it switches to the Surround View Camera System screen.
1 Using the Shift Button
If you do not touch any switches after changing the gear position to the position, the display switches from the Rear View screen to the previous screen when the gear position is changed out of . If you touch any switches while the gear position is in , the display switches from the Rear View screen to the Front View screen when the gear position is changed out of .
You can customize the display setting. 2 Customized Surround View Camera
System P. 375
You can adjust the brightness of the rearview camera.
2 Display Settings P. 28
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 358
Change the gear position to with the brake pedal depressed. u Displays the rear view. To switch
the screen, press the CAMERA button.
Using the Shift Button
Shift Button
uuSurround View Camera*uSwitching the Screen O
th er Featu
res
1 Switching the Screen
In the view image fixed guidelines are displayed which help the driver get a sense of distance between the vehicle and objects.
Dynamic guidelines are displayed which help the driver confirm the projected vehicle path.
The guidelines can be turned ON/OFF to setup.
The positions/distances indicated by the guide lines and camera views on the display may differ from the actual positions/distances due to the changes in the vehicle height, road conditions, and other factors. The guide lines should be used as a reference only.
You can also select to switch the display for the following marks on the screen.
: Front Ground View : Front Blind View : Right Side View/Left and Right Side View
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 359
Switching the Screen
Front View Screen (When Gear Position is in Other than [R] Position)
CAMERA button Front Ground View
Front Blind View
Right Side View
CAMERA button or ENTER button
CAMERA button or ENTER button
CAMERA button or ENTER button
Press and hold CAMERA button or ENTER button
Left and Right Side View
359Continued
uuSurround View Camera*uSwitching the Screen
360
O th
er Featu res
1 Rear View Screen (When Gear Position is in [R] Position)
You can also select to switch the display for the following marks on the screen.
: Rear Ground View : Rear Normal View : Rear Wide View
Visually confirm safety around the vehicle with your own eyes and/or using the mirrors. The view area displayed on the screen is restricted. It may not show all people or obstacles around you. Relying only on the view on the screen may cause an accident.
Minimize the time spent looking at the view screen while driving. Failure to do so may cause an accident as you cannot pay sufficient attention to your surroundings.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 360
Rear View Screen (When Gear Position is in [R] Position)
Rear Ground View
Rear View
Rear Wide View
CAMERA button or ENTER button
CAMERA button or ENTER button
CAMERA button or ENTER button
Shift Button
uuSurround View Camera*uBacking Up The Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines O
th er Featu
res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 361
Backing Up The Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines When backing up the vehicle into a parking space with parking lines, the parking guide lines of the Surround View Camera System provide support to the driver during parking.
The rear reference guide lines of the Surround view camera system can be used in a parking space marked with parking lines, such as that shown in the figure below.
Before Parking
About 20 feet (6 m) or more
About 8 feet (2.5 m) or more
361Continued
362
uuSurround View Camera*uBacking Up The Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 362
1. Press the CAMERA button while the vehicle is stopped.
2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select Back-in left park guidance
or Back-in right park guidance.
Selecting Rear Reference Lines
uuSurround View Camera*uBacking Up The Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines O
th er Featu
res
1 How to park
When you need operation instruction, press and hold the CAMERA button while the parking guide screen is displayed. The instruction screen appears on the screen. To close the Instruction screen, press the BACK button or press and hold the CAMERA button.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 363
The following section describes how to back up the vehicle into a parking space with the rear right of the vehicle in first.
1. Move the vehicle forward perpendicular to the parking space and stop where the initial positioning guide comes to the center of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left while stopped. u The steering position alignment guide is displayed.
How to park
Initial positioning guide
Steering position alignment guide
Continued 363
uuSurround View Camera*uBacking Up The Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
364
O th
er Featu res
1 How to park
If the steering position alignment guide does not fit in the parking lines, the parking space is too small for the vehicle. This system does not work for: Parking spaces with crooked parking lines.
Parking spaces where the surrounding vehicles are parked off the parking lines.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 364
3. Slowly move the vehicle forward with the steering wheel turned fully to the left.
4. Stop the vehicle when the steering position alignment guide enters the parking space.
5. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left while stopped and back up the vehicle slowly.
6. Stop the vehicle when it is parallel to the parking lines. 7. Straighten the steering wheel, back up, and park the vehicle in the proper
position.
Make sure that the steering position alignment guide comes within the parking space.
uuSurround View Camera*uParallel Parking the Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines O
th er Featu
res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 365
Parallel Parking the Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines The parallel parking guide lines of the Surround View Camera System provide support to the driver while parking in parking spaces, such as that shown in the figure below.
The rear reference guide lines of the Surround View Camera System can be used in a parking space marked with parking lines, such as that shown in the figure below.
You may need to try more than once before parking the vehicle in the parking space properly depending on the condition of the space. In such a case, adjust the vehicle position while looking around the vehicle to park the vehicle in the proper parking position.
Before Parking
About 20 feet (6 m) or more
About 8 feet (2.5 m) or more
About 21 feet (6.5 m) or more
365Continued
366
uuSurround View Camera*uParallel Parking the Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 366
1. Press the CAMERA button while the vehicle is stopped.
2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select Left parallel park guidance
or Right parallel park guidance.
Selecting Parallel Park Reference Lines
uuSurround View Camera*uParallel Parking the Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines O
th er Featu
res
1 How to park
When you need operation instruction, press and hold the CAMERA button while the parking guide screen is displayed. The instruction screen appears on the screen. To close the Instruction screen, select press the BACK button or press and hold the CAMERA button.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 367
The following section describes how to parallel-park the vehicle into a parking space at the right side of the street.
1. Move the vehicle forward parallel to the parking space and stop where the initial positioning guide overlaps the front corner of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel fully to the right while stopped. u The steering position alignment guide is displayed.
How to park
Positioning guide
Steering position alignment guide
Continued 367
uuSurround View Camera*uParallel Parking the Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines
368
O th
er Featu res
1 How to park
Always take care when backing up, and look behind you for obstacles. This system does not work for: Parking spaces with crooked parking lines.
Parking spaces where the surrounding vehicles are parked off the parking lines.
Parking spaces without parking lines.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 368
3. Slowly back up the vehicle with the steering wheel turned fully to the right.
4. Stop the vehicle when the steering position alignment guide overlaps the sideline of the parking space.
5. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left while stopped and back up the vehicle slowly.
6. Stop the vehicle when it is parallel to the parking lines. 7. Straighten the steering wheel, and then back up and park the vehicle at the
proper position.
Make sure that the steering position alignment guide overlaps the sideline of the parking space.
uuSurround View Camera*uChecking for Obstacles at the Rear of the Vehicle O
th er Featu
res
1 Checking for Obstacles at the Rear of the Vehicle
Each guide line display can be turned ON/OFF.
The four cameras provide the ground view on the screen even when the door mirrors are folded. Note that the view area and blind spots change when the door mirrors are folded.
Display on the screen when the mirrors are folded
Do not drive the vehicle with the door mirrors folded. The view displayed on the screen when the door mirrors are folded is for confirming the safety around the vehicle during parking.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 369
Checking for Obstacles at the Rear of the Vehicle Display the rear view screen to check for any obstacles at the rear of the vehicle when backing up the vehicle into a garage or the like. Switch between the rear view and ground view, as well as the rear view and mirror view accordingly.
369Continued
370
uuSurround View Camera*uChecking for Obstacles at the Rear of the Vehicle
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 370
Description and operation of the screens Change the gear position to . u Display the rear ground view screen.
Rear view
7.9 inches (20 cm) Tailgate
39 inches (1 m)
79 inches (2 m)
118 inches (3 m)
118 inches (3 m)
Distance the projection lines indicate.
The view image from the rear camera. View area of the screen and distances the reference lines indicate.
Rear and Ground View screen
Turn the steering wheel more than 90 degrees
Press the CAMERA button to change the screen to the rear wide view and the rear normal view screen.
Ground view An overhead view image of the vehicle synthesized from the images from the four cameras. When the steering wheel is turned, the projection lines that show the vehicles projected trajectory and tire angles are displayed. Blind spots appear in black. Blind spots are to appear black. The projection lines are displayed 40cm outside of the vehicle body.
uuSurround View Camera*uChecking for Obstacles at the Rear of the Vehicle O
th er Featu
res
1 Checking for Obstacles at the Rear of the Vehicle
Each side view is not displayed when the door mirrors are folded.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 371
The view image from the rear camera.
79 inches (2 m)
118 inches (3 m)
39 inches (1 m)
Rear Wide View
Press the CAMERA button to change the screen to the rear ground view screen.
Rear Normal View
Tailgate
371
372
uuSurround View Camera*uChecking the Right and Left Sides of the Vehicle at Intersections with Poor Visibility
O th
er Featu res
1 Checking the Right and Left Sides of the Vehicle at Intersections with Poor Visibility
As the system uses a wide-angle view, the displayed images on the screen will be largely distorted and different from the actual distance.
The front blind view screen is switched in the order shown in the figure on P. 359.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 372
Checking the Right and Left Sides of the Vehicle at Intersections with Poor Visibility Display the front blind view screen when conforming the right and left sides of the vehicle at intersections with poor visibility.
Description and Operation of the Screens To switch the screens, press the CAMERA button when the vehicle speed is below 7 mph (12 km/h). u Display the front blind view screen.
The view area of the screen is 180 degrees.
Front blind view screen
Front blind view The view image from the front camera.
uuSurround View Camera*uChecking for Obstacles in Front of the Vehicle O
th er Featu
res
1 Checking for Obstacles in Front of the Vehicle
Each guide line display can be turned ON/OFF.
The front view and ground view screen are switched to in the order shown in the figure on P. 359.
The four cameras provide the ground view on the screen even when the door mirrors are folded. Note that the view area and blind spots change when the door mirrors are folded.
Display on the screen when the mirrors are folded
Do not drive the vehicle with the door mirrors folded. The view displayed on the screen when the door mirrors are folded is for confirming the safety around the vehicle during parking.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 373
Checking for Obstacles in Front of the Vehicle Display the front view and ground view screen to check for any obstacles in front of the vehicle when parking the vehicle in a garage or the like.
Description and Operation of the Screens To switch the screens, press the CAMERA button when the vehicle speed is below 7 mph (12 km/h). u Display the front view and ground view screen.
Front view The view image from the front camera. View area of the screen and distances the reference lines indicate. Front view and ground view screen
Ground view An overhead view image of the vehicle synthesized from the images from the four cameras.
When the steering wheel is turned, the projection lines that show the vehicles projected trajectory and tire angles are displayed.
39 inches (1 m)
Motion that the projection lines indicate. Turn the
steering wheel
Blind spots appear in black.
373
374
uuSurround View Camera*uChecking for Obstacles Around the Front Sides of the Vehicle
O th
er Featu res
1 Checking for Obstacles Around the Front Sides of the Vehicle
Each guide line display can be turned ON/OFF.
When the door mirrors are folded, the side view screen is not displayed.
The side view screen is switched in the order shown in the figure on P. 359.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 374
Checking for Obstacles Around the Front Sides of the Vehicle Display the side view screen to check the right and left sides of the vehicle when pulling up the vehicle to a curve or tollbooth or passing an oncoming car in a narrow driving condition. The left side view screen displays only the left side view, and the right and left side view screen display the views of both sides. Switch the screens accordingly.
Description and Operation of the Screens Display the side view and ground view screen. u To switch the screens, press the CAMERA button when the vehicle speed is
below 7 mph (12 km/h).
Side view The view image from the side camera.
Side view screen
Distance the projection lines indicate is approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the outside of the vehicle
12 inches (30 cm)
Press and hold the CAMERA button
12 inches (30 cm)
12 inches (30 cm)
uuSurround View Camera*uCustomized Surround View Camera System O
th er Featu
res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 375
Customized Surround View Camera System H CAMERA button u SETTINGS button u Camera Settings
Set the camera screen settings.
The following items are available: Fixed Guideline: Sets whether to turn the display of the reference lines on or
not. On: Displays the reference lines. Off: Disables the feature.
Dynamic Guideline: Sets whether to turn the display of the projection lines on or not. On: Displays the projection lines. Off: Disables the feature.
Automatically Show Camera After Reverse: Sets whether to automatically switch between the cameras to use when the gear position is changed out of to move the vehicle forward. On Off
375Continued
376
uuSurround View Camera*uCustomized Surround View Camera System
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 376
Default Camera Mode in Forward: Sets which screen to display when the multi-view camera system is turned on while the vehicle is moving forward. Front ground view Last Used Front blind view Side view
Default Camera Mode in Reverse: Sets which screen to display when the multi- view camera system is turned on while the vehicle is backing up. Rear ground view Last Used Rear normal view Rear wide view
Show Camera When Decelerating: Sets whether to automatically return the display to the camera view screen when the vehicle speed is reduced to lower than 7 mph (12 km/h), after the display is switched from the camera view screen to audio/information screen when the vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h) while the Surround View Camera System is on. On Off
Clear Parking Guidance Automatically: Sets whether to automatically turn the display of the parking guide lines off or not. On: Displays the parking guide lines. Off: Disables the feature.
Display: Adjust the screens preferences.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 377
Troubleshooting
th er Featu
res
olution Reference page
d turn the en the initial omes to the pace.
2 Backing Up The Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines P. 361
d turn the en the steering guide fits in the
ing wheel when steering.
d turn the en the initial omes to the ng space.
d turn the en the steering guide fits in the
matically corrected after for a short amount of time.
Backing up using the parking guide lines
Vehicle position Cause S
Turns too big. Did you turn the steering wheel before the initial positioning guide enters the parking space?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh positioning guide c center of parking s
Did you turn the steering wheel before the steering position alignment guide enters the parking space while backing up?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh position alignment parking space.
Did you fully turn the steering wheel while backing up?
Fully turn the steer
Turns too short. Did you turn the steering wheel after the initial positioning guide comes outside of the parking space?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh positioning guide c center of the parki
Did the steering position alignment guide come off of the parking space while backing up?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh position alignment parking space.
The projection line is off.
- The position is auto continuing to drive
377
378
uuTroubleshootinguParallel-parking using the parking guide lines
O th
er Featu res
olution Reference page
d turn the en the steering guide overlaps ne of the parking
2 Parallel Parking the Vehicle into a Parking Space Marked with Parking Lines P. 365
ing wheel when steering.
d turn the en the steering guide overlaps ne of the parking
d turn the en the initial omes to the ng space.
d turn the en the initial omes to the ng space.
ing wheel when steering.
omatically corrected after for a short amount of time.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 378
Parallel-parking using the parking guide lines
Vehicle position Cause S
Too deep. Did the steering position alignment guide come off of the curbside line of the parking space while backing up?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh position alignment with the curbside li space.
Did you fully turn the steering wheel while backing up?
Fully turn the steer
Too shallow. Did you turn the steering wheel before the steering position alignment guide overlaps with the curbside line of the parking space while backing up?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh position alignment with the curbside li space.
Too close to the vehicle in front.
Did you turn the steering wheel when the initial positioning guide is outside of the parking space?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh positioning guide c corner of the parki
Too close to the vehicle behind.
Was the initial positioning guide inside of the parking space?
Stop the vehicle an steering wheel wh positioning guide c corner of the parki
Did you fully turn the steering wheel while backing up?
Fully turn the steer
The projection line is off.
- The position is aut continuing to drive
uuTroubleshootinguAbout camera view image O
th er Featu
res
olution Refer to:
view image is not clearly eather conditions, etc, safety using mirrors.
-
ens is dirty, wipe off the dirt, using water, mild cleaner. zine, thinner, or polishing anser. It will cause damage
-
vere impacts or pressures on r its surrounding parts. bject to an impact, stop nd contact a dealer.
-
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 379
About camera view image
Condition Cause S
Camera view images are hard to see.
The images may not be displayed clearly when: At night, in rainy condition, and a dark
location. The camera lens has insects, moist, or
debris stuck to the camera lens. The camera lens is scratched. The temperature of the camera is high. Strong light such as the suns light shines
on the camera.*1
When light shines on the camera in a dark location.
*1: When strong light shines on the camera, halation which fogs around the light source or smearing which creates the streaks of the light may occur.
When the camera displayed due to w visually confirm the
Camera view images are not clear.
If the camera lens is dirty, clear images are not displayed.
When the camera l debris, and the like detergent, or glass
Never use any ben powder such as cle to the lens.
Camera position is shifted.
The camera body or its surrounding parts have been subject to some severe impact or pressure.
Do not have any se the camera body o
In case of being su using the camera a
379
380
O th
er Featu res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 380
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
1 HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage doors path.
Important Safety Precautions
uuHomeLink Universal TransceiveruTraining HomeLink O
th er Featu
res
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 381
Training HomeLink If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: Press and hold the two outside
buttons for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1.
If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.
The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.
Red Indicator
381Continued
uuHomeLink Universal TransceiveruTraining HomeLink
382
O th
er Featu res
1 Training HomeLink
Retraining a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:
Erasing Codes To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink (about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the devices instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
2. Quickly release the HomeLink button and follow steps 1 - 3 under Training a Button. You do not need to press and release the HomeLink button again in step 2.
Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.
Standard transmitter Indicator remains on for about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 382
Training a Button
4.
3.
2.
5. A.
B.
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program.
Press and release the desired HomeLink button. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a sec. Does the device (garage door opener) work?
Press and release the HomeLink button. Press and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly blinking to constantly on or rapidly blinking? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
Training Complete
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.
Training Complete
The remote has a rolling code. Press the learn button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
HomeLink indicator rapidly blinks.HomeLink LED is constantly on.
YES NO
YES
YES NO NO
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 383
Troubleshooting
83
Troubleshooting ....................................384 Map, Voice, Entering Destinations.........384 Traffic ...................................................386 Guidance, Routing ................................387 Update, Coverage, Map Errors ..............389 Display, Accessories ..............................389 Multi-View Rear Camera .......................389 Miscellaneous Questions .......................390
Error Messages ......................................391 Navigation System ................................391 CD Player ..............................................392 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio .................393 iPod/USB Flash Drive .............................394 Pandora* ............................................395
3
AhaTM Radio ......................................... 398 Surround View Camera* ...................... 398
384
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 384
Troubleshooting
ution
n screen reminds you and your guest system in a safe manner. The Startup
rtain period of time and the top screen of
peratures or shock from bumpy roads, and . If this happens frequently, please see a
es are lumped in with a major metro area. bdivisions, streets may be missing or only
rom the map.
r a place/landmark, the navigation system s are possible and grays out letters that do
avi Settings > Personal Info to display
stem Settings and check that Guidance
mpt to On.
HandsFreeLink or, if paired, your phone
Map, Voice, Entering Destinations
Problem Sol
The Startup Confirmation screen is displayed every time I start the car.
This is normal. The Startup Confirmatio drivers to always operate the navigation Confirmation screen goes off after a ce the last mode is displayed.
The navigation system reboots by itself (returns to the opening screen).
A reboot can be caused by extreme tem does not necessarily indicate a problem dealer.
How do I specify a destination when an entered city or street could not be found?
Try entering the street first. Some citi In rural unverified areas or new su partially numbered.
Try selecting the destination directly f 2 Map Input P. 148
Why do some letters become grayed out when I enter an address?
As you enter each letter in an address o looks in the database to see what letter not apply.
How do I delete Personal Addresses, Previous Destinations, or the Home Address?
1. Press the SETTINGS button. Select N the types of information.
2. Select the type of address to delete. 3. Select Delete.
I cannot hear the navigation system voice. 1. Press the SETTINGS button. Select Sy Volume is not set to 0.
2. Select Voice Reco and set Voice Pro
Why is Call grayed out on the Calculate Route screen?
Your phone is not paired to Bluetooth is in use.
2 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink P. 266
uuTroubleshootinguMap, Voice, Entering Destinations Tro
u b
lesh o
o tin
g
r onto the microphone on the ceiling, the re using the correct command when
up Confirmation screen.
rtain onscreen functions and features are moving. Use voice commands or pull over
-recorded voice, but street names are voice. Consequently, the name may be es.
brightness control is not set to maximum. avi Settings > Map > Color (Night).
i Settings > Map > Color (Day).
avi Settings > Personal Info > PIN Home PIN. e the choice to change or remove the PIN.
ution
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 385
The voice control system is having difficulty recognizing my voice commands.
Check that the vents are not blowing ai vehicle is as quiet as possible, and you a speaking.
2 Voice Recognition P. 25
I cannot give voice commands. Make sure you selected OK at the Start 2 Start-up P. 22
I cannot select an option using the Interface Dial.
To reduce potential driver distraction, ce limited or inoperable while the vehicle is to proceed.
The navigation system pronunciation of street names in the guidance command or destination address sounds strange.
The basic guidance phrases use a studio pronounced using a machine-generated mispronounced or sound strange at tim
The screen is bright when I drive at night. 1. Check that the nighttime dashboard 2. Press the SETTINGS button. Select N
2 Color P. 75
The screen is dark when I drive during the day.
Press the SETTINGS button. Select Nav 2 Color P. 75
How do I change or remove my PIN? 1. Press the SETTINGS button. Select N Number > Address Book PIN or Go
2. Enter your existing PIN. You then hav 2 PIN Numbers P. 49
I have forgotten my PIN. How do I reset the PIN for Home or the PIN for personal addresses?
A dealer must reset the PIN for you.
Problem Sol
385
386
uuTroubleshootinguTraffic
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
Solution
dicator is available on the map screen. raLink Real-Time Traffic* P. 10 clear signal. If signal strength is low, traffic data
e turned on. . 73 ption status.*1
hnical problem in your metropolitan area. Call if there is an outage. ontact Information P. 404 ur Acura dealer for assistance. only in certain areas.
n, the navigation system provides a detour route find a significantly faster route than the original
hich route should be faster based on freeway/ route. Use your own experience to determine uld be faster.
ect Navi Settings > Routing, and set Traffic
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 386
Traffic
*1: Canadian models
Problem
Traffic information is missing or is not displaying properly. What is wrong?
Check that the traffic status in 2 Traffic Information*/Acu
Traffic information relies on a may not be available.
Check that the traffic icons ar 2 Showing Icons on Map P
Check the AcuraLink subscri 2 AcuraLink P. 314
There may be a temporary tec Acura Client Relations to see
2 Acura Client Relations C If the situation persists, see yo Traffic information is available
The navigation system sometimes provides a detour route when I am driving a route on the freeway/ highway.
If Traffic Rerouting is set to O to your destination only if it can one.
2 Traffic Rerouting P. 60
The navigation system routes me to an exit and an alternate freeway/highway with unknown flow speeds or surface streets.
The navigation system predicts w highway congestion along your whether the alternate route wo
How can I ignore the detour route and return to the original route?
Press the SETTINGS button. Sel Rerouting to Off.
2 Traffic Rerouting P. 60
* Not available on all models
uuTroubleshootinguGuidance, Routing Tro
u b
lesh o
o tin
g
Solution
to generate the optimal route. You can change n calculating a route.
ct Navi Settings > Routing, and set Traffic
tly undergoing revision. You can access the most et.
ed from the GPS satellites are extremely weak and rfered as your vehicle travel near tall buildings or rroundings for anything that may be blocking the ntly and there is no obstruction that is interfering ler.
rified area.
ct Navi Settings > Map > View > North-up.
wer traffic, the navigation system updates the your actual road speed to give you a better
stem is unaware of the width of intersections. tion can indicate a temporary loss of the GPS
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 387
Guidance, Routing
Problem
The navigation system does not route me the same way I would go or the same way as other mapping systems.
The navigation system attempts the route preferences used whe
2 Route Preference P. 56
The navigation system wants to route me around potential traffic problems. How do I stop these pop- up messages?
Press the SETTINGS button. Sele Rerouting to Off.
2 Traffic Rerouting P. 60
The street Im on is not shown on the map screen. The mapping database is constan recent information on the intern
2 Map Coverage P. 405
The vehicle position icon is not following the road and the GPS icon text in the upper left hand corner of the screen is white or missing.
This is normal. The signals receiv can easily be interrupted or inte in tunnels. Check your vehicle su reception. If this happens freque with reception, please see a dea
2 GPS P. 402
The blue highlighted route and voice guidance stopped or turned into a blue/pink line before I got to my destination.
Your route has entered an unve 2 Unverified Routing P. 58
How do I stop the map from rotating as I drive along?
Press the SETTINGS button. Sele
The time to destination display sometimes increases even though I am getting closer to my destination.
If your speed reduces due to slo time to destination based on estimate of arrival time.
The vehicle position icon on the map lags a short distance behind, especially when I arrive at an intersection.
This is normal. The navigation sy Large differences in vehicle posi signal.
2 GPS P. 402
387
388
uuTroubleshootinguGuidance, Routing
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
mbs. These are displayed if Display Tracking is
ct Navi Settings > Map, set Display Tracking to o remove the white dots from the map.
avoid, make sure to select sections of roads that .
vary 100 ft (30 m) due to GPS calculation
the GPS antenna can receive signals from at least hicle into an open area. The elevation is also not
tion is zero or below sea level.
Solution
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 388
The screen is showing white dots as I drive along. These dots are called breadcru set to On.
How do I remove the white dots (breadcrumbs) from my screen?
Press the SETTINGS button. Sele Off or select Delete Tracking t
2 Display Tracking P. 86
A road that I selected to avoid is being used when routing.
When you draw your area to include at least one intersection
2 Avoided Area P. 62
My elevation (shown when I display the current position) seems to fluctuate even though my elevation has not changed.
This is normal. The elevation can errors.
2 GPS P. 402
My elevation is missing on the current position screen.
The elevation is only displayed if four satellites. Try moving the ve displayed if the calculated eleva
Problem
uuTroubleshootinguUpdate, Coverage, Map Errors Tro
u b
lesh o
o tin
g
Solution
tly undergoing revision. You can access the most et.
aps for the 50 U.S. states, Canada, Puerto Rico, em will not work in other countries.
in a large database. If you encounter major errors,
Solution
ecome brighter after a few minutes.
Solution
o or out of Reverse, you may experience a delay between the audio/information screen and the
ayed, rotate the Interface Dial to adjust the s not affect the audio/information screen
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 389
Update, Coverage, Map Errors
Display, Accessories
Multi-View Rear Camera
Problem
My city is not part of a fully verified detailed coverage area.
The mapping database is constan recent information on the intern
2 Map Coverage P. 405
Does the navigation system work outside North America?
The navigation system contains m and Mexico. The navigation syst
2 Map Coverage P. 405
How do I report errors I find in the database? Minor errors are bound to occur see your dealer.
2 Visiting Your Dealer P. 404
Problem
The display appears dim when starting the car in really cold weather.
This is normal. The display will b
Problem
When I shift gears, the rear camera image display is delayed.
This is normal. When shifting int while the screen image switches rear camera image.
The rear camera image is too dark or too bright. How do I adjust the brightness?
While the camera image is displ brightness. This adjustment doe brightness settings.
389
390
uuTroubleshootinguMiscellaneous Questions
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
Solution
press and hold the (Power) button for two tivate. If you have installed an aftermarket system,
Solution
to or out of Reverse, you may experience a delay between the audio/information screen and the
ayed, press the SETTINGS button and select iew Camera > Preference > Display, and select his adjustment does not affect the audio/ ttings.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 390
Miscellaneous Questions
Surround View Camera*
Problem
My battery was disconnected or went dead, and the navigation system is asking for a code.
Set the power mode to ON, and seconds. The system should reac contact a dealer.
Problem
When I shift gears, the rear camera image display is delayed.
This is normal. When shifting in while the screen image switches rear camera image.
The rear camera image is too dark or too bright. How do I adjust the brightness?
While the camera image is displ Camera Settings > Surround V or to adjust the brightness. T information screen brightness se
* Not available on all models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 391
Error Messages
u b
lesh o
o tin
g
Solution
en the display temperature is too high. The the display cools down. The system turns back on ools down.
ulty reading the HDD when the temperature is C). The navigation system starts up automatically
atmospheric pressure. Move your vehicle to the essure is high.
ulty reading the HDD when the temperature is ts up automatically when the system cools down.
failed with a cause other than low temperature, spheric pressure. After a short wait, try to operate t solve the problem, consult with the dealer.
Navigation System
Error Message
The display temperature is too high. For protection, the system will shut off until the display cools down.
This message appears briefly wh navigation system turns off until automatically when the display c
The navigation system temperature is too low. For protection, the system will shut off until the it warms up.
The navigation system has diffic below approximately -22F (-30 when the display warms up.
The navigation system atmospheric pressure is too low. For protection, the system will shut off until the pressure returns to safe levels.
The HDD is inoperable due to low place where the atmospheric pr
The navigation system temperature is too high. For protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.
The navigation system has diffic high. The navigation system star
HDD access error. Please consult your dealer. Writing of the data to the HDD high temperature, and low atmo the system again. If this does no
HDD access error. The system will reset and attempt to correct the problem.
391
392
uuError MessagesuCD Player
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
Solution
ile will be skipped. The next supported track/file cally.
ject) button and remove the disc, and check that ge is cleared.
disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
g CDs P. 226
ssage reappears, press the (eject) button, and c. nt disc. plays, there is a problem with the first disc. ssage repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, r. rce the disc out of the player.
disc is not damaged or deformed. g CDs P. 226
system off and allow the player to cool down until ge is cleared.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 392
CD Player If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message Cause
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported Current track/f plays automati
Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual Push Eject
Mechanical error Press the (e the error messa
Mecha Error Check that the disc again.
2 Protectin
Bad Disc Please Check Owners Manual
Servo error If the error me pull out the dis
Insert a differe If the new disc
If the error me contact a deale Do not try to fo
Check Disc Disc error Check that the 2 Protectin
Heat Error High temperature Turn the audio the error messa
uuError MessagesuHard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio Tro
u b
lesh o
o tin
g
Cause
llow the player to cool down until the error
ulty reading the HDD when the temperature is C). The navigation system starts up automatically
upported. Current track will be skipped. The next ally.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 393
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
HDD access error. Please consult your dealer.
The navigation system temperature is too high. For protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.
Turn the audio system off and a message is cleared.
The navigation system temperature is too low. For protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.
The navigation system has diffic below approximately -22F (-30 when the display warms up.
Unplayable File Appears when a file format not s supported track plays automatic
393
394
uuError Messagesu iPod/USB Flash Drive
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
Cause
with the audio system. Check if the device is m.
device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then urn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that
iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported od software to the newer version. not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
B flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. bout 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
.
ve is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC
stored on the device.
device is connected. If it appears when a reconnect the device.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 394
iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
USB Error Appears when there is a problem compatible with the audio syste
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual
Appears when an incompatible turn the audio system off, and t caused the error.
Unsupported Version Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected, update the iP Appears when the system does
Connect Retry
Unplayable File Appears when the files in the US This error message appears for a
No Data Appears when the iPod is empty
Appears when the USB flash dri files in the USB flash drive.
Check that compatible files are
Unsupported Appears when an unsupported supported device is connected,
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
uuError MessagesuPandora* Tro
u b
lesh o
o tin
g
Solution
evice is Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
list on Use the device to create a station.
song or ined
Try again later.
Try again later.
le with Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
is not Update Pandora to the latest version.
ver is in Try again later.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 395
Pandora*
If an error occurs while playing Pandora, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Cause
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual
Appears when an incompatible d connected.
There is no station list in the device. Please add the station list to your device.
No stations have been created. Please create a station on the device.
Appears when there is no station the device.
Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may skip each hour.
Appears when you try to skip a select Dislike over the predeterm number of times in an hour.
Unable to save rating. Unable to save bookmark.
Appears when the commanded operation has failed.
No data Appears when no data is availab Pandora activated.
Unsupported Appears when Pandora version supported.PANDORA App version is not supported.
PANDORA system maintenance Appears when the Pandora ser maintenance.
U.S. models
Audio/Information screen
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
395* Not available on all models
396
uuError MessagesuPandora*
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
errors: ne is
creen on
r onds
lled in version
Turn the phone screen on, and make sure it is unlocked.
The Pandora version is not supported. Update to the latest version.
hone is ncher
Download the most recent version of the Pandora app.
. Download the HondaLink app from www.hondalink.com.
eated Delete the unneeded stations from the Station List.
a new Try again later.
Solution
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 396
Cannot connect to PANDORA. When stopped, check your mobile device.
The Pandora app failed to start because of the following device The display on your smartpho
turned off. Your smartphone is locked. The home screen or the app s
(music screen) is not displayed your smartphone.
The track is not played on you smartphone even after 30 sec have passed.
The Pandora app is not insta your device, or the Pandora is not supported.
When not driving, please see mobile device.
The Pandora app in your smartp not compatible with the app lau system.
The required app is not installed
The maximum number of stations that can be created is 100. To create more, please delete one or more previously created stations.
Appears when the number of cr stations reaches the limitation.
Unable to create new station. Please try again.
Appears when you try to create station.
Error Message Cause
uuError MessagesuPandora* Tro
u b
lesh o
o tin
g
Try again later.
Try again later.
Log in to the PANDORA sever.
elected Select another station.
Solution
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 397
Unable to play PANDORA. Please try again later.
Appears when you try to play PANDORA.
Unable to play PANDORA. Music licensing restricts play in this area.
Unable to play PANDORA. When stopped, log-in to PANDORA.
This PANDORA station is currently not available. Please select another station.
Appears when the station you s is not currently available.
Error Message Cause
397
398
uuError MessagesuAhaTM Radio
Tro u
b lesh
o o
tin g
Cause
not activated. Check your device.
device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then urn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 398
AhaTM Radio If an error occurs while playing AhaTM Radio, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Surround View Camera*
If an error message is displayed, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Cannot connect to AcuraLink. When stopped, check your mobile device.
Appears when the AhaTM app is
Incompatible USB Device Please Check Owners Manual
Appears when an incompatible turn the audio system off, and t caused the error.
* Not available on all models
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 399
Reference Information
99
System Initialization ..............................400 Entering the Security Code....................400 Acquiring GPS Information....................400 Startup Confirmation Screen.................401 Map Matching ......................................401
System Limitations ................................402 GPS ......................................................402 Address Calculation ..............................402 Database ..............................................402
Client Assistance ....................................404 Resolving Problems ...............................404 Acura Client Relations Contact Information...404 Visiting Your Dealer ..............................404 Map Coverage ......................................405
3
Obtaining a Navigation Update ............ 405 Traffic Information ............................... 406 Operation in Alaska, Hawaii, Canada, Puerto Rico, and Mexico ...................................... 406
Legal Information ................................. 407 Copyrights ........................................... 407 User Agreements ................................. 407 As required by the FCC ........................ 412
400
R eferen
ce In fo
rm atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 400
System Initialization
The navigation system must be initialized if power to the navigation system is interrupted for any reason (e.g., the battery was disconnected).
Entering the Security Code In most cases, you do not need to enter a security code. Follow the steps below to reactivate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system.
2. Press and hold the (Power) button for more than two seconds. u The system is reactivated when the
systems control unit recognizes that the system is in your vehicle. If the control unit fails to recognize, you must go to a dealer and have the system checked.
Acquiring GPS Information Depending on the length of time the power was interrupted, your system may require GPS initialization.
If initialization is not necessary, the system proceeds directly to the Startup Confirmation screen. If the system fails to locate a sufficient number of satellites to locate your position within 10 minutes, the following screen is displayed.
If you are experiencing GPS reception problems:
2 GPS P. 402
uuSystem InitializationuStartup Confirmation Screen R
eferen ce In
fo rm
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 401
Startup Confirmation Screen The Startup Confirmation screen is displayed when initialization has successfully completed. It is displayed every time you start your vehicle. Press to select OK to continue.
Map Matching Map matching is the process of using the acquired GPS information to locate your position on the map screen. If you are on a mapped road, the name of the road is displayed along the bottom of the map screen when map matching is completed. Do not enter a destination until the road name is displayed. The system may initially show your location on a different street (e.g., in urban areas where streets are close together), may show an incorrect elevation, or may delay the display of the vehicle position icon at intersections. This is normal; the system will correct itself while you drive.
401
402
R eferen
ce In fo
rm atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 402
System Limitations
GPS The signals received from GPS satellites are extremely weak (less than a millionth of the strength of a local FM station) and require an unobstructed view of the sky. The GPS antenna is located in the roof. The signal reception can easily be interrupted or interfered with by trees, tall buildings, freeway/highway overpasses, tunnels, or overhead electrical power wires. GPS is operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. For security reasons, there are certain inaccuracies built into GPS for which the navigation system must constantly compensate. This can cause occasional positioning errors of up to several hundred feet or tens of meters.
Address Calculation The destination icon shows only the approximate location of a destination address. This occurs if the number of possible addresses is different from the number of actual addresses on a block. For example, the address 1425 on a 1400 block with 100 possible addresses (because it is followed by the 1500 block) will be shown a quarter of the way down the block by the system. If there are only 25 actual addresses on the block, the actual location of address 1425 would be at the end of the block.
Database The digitized map database reflects conditions as they existed at various points in time before production. Accordingly, your database may contain inaccurate or incomplete data or information due to the passage of time, road construction, changing conditions, or other causes. For example, some places/landmarks may be missing when you search the database because the name was misspelled, the place was improperly categorized, or a place/ landmark is not yet in the database. This is also true for police stations, hospitals, and other public institutions. Do not rely on the navigation system if you need law enforcement or hospital services. Always check with local information sources. In addition, the map database contains verified and unverified areas. Unverified streets may be missing from the map, in the wrong location, or have an incorrect name or address range. A message will warn you if your route includes unverified streets. Exercise additional caution when driving in unverified areas.
uuSystem LimitationsuDatabase R
eferen ce In
fo rm
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 403
The database does not include, analyze, process, consider, or reflect any of the following categories of information: Neighborhood quality or safety Population density Availability or proximity of law
enforcement Emergency, rescue, medical, or other
assistance Construction work, zones, or hazards Road and lane closures Legal restrictions (such as vehicular type,
weight, load, height, and speed restrictions)
Road slope or grade Bridge height, width, weight, or other
limits Traffic facilities safety Special events Pavement characteristics or conditions Every effort has been made to verify that the database is accurate. The number of inaccuracies you experience increases the longer you go without obtaining an updated map database.
2 Obtaining a Navigation Update P. 405
We assume no liability for any incident that may result from an error in the program, or from changed conditions not noted above.
403
404
R eferen
ce In fo
rm atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 404
Client Assistance
Resolving Problems If you run into a specific issue that you cannot resolve, consult the following help resources: For navigation system issues:
2 Troubleshooting P. 384
There are also FAQs available online at www.acuranavi.com (U.S.) or www.acuranavi.ca (Canada).
For traffic-related issues: 2 Traffic P. 386
For reporting issues with the database or places/landmarks:
2 Visiting Your Dealer P. 404
Call Acura Client Relations. 2 Acura Client Relations Contact
Information P. 404
Acura Client Relations Contact Information Acura Navi American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Relations Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Telephone: (800) 382-2238
Honda Canada Inc. Acura Client Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, L6C 0H9, ON E-Mail: acura_cr@ch.honda.com Telephone: (888) 9-ACURA-9 Hours: 8:00 am to 7:30 pm Monday to Friday (Eastern time)
Visiting Your Dealer If you have a question that you cannot resolve using the available help resources, you can consult a dealer. Please identify the specific issue (e.g., error occurs when you enter a specific address, when driving on a certain road, or just when its cold) so that the service technician can refer the issue to the factory so that a solution can be found. Be patient, the service technician may be unfamiliar with your specific issue.
uuClient AssistanceuMap Coverage R
eferen ce In
fo rm
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 405
Map Coverage The navigation system provides map coverage for the United States, Canada, Puerto Rico, and Mexico. The map coverage consists of accurately mapped (verified) metropolitan areas and a less accurate (unverified) rural database. Note that unverified areas are constantly being reviewed and converted to verified areas each year. This screen is an example.
Map coverage update information is available from Acura Client Relations or online at www.acuranavi.com (U.S.) or www.acuranavi.ca (Canada).
To find navigation system update information: 1. Visit the website. 2. Enter your vehicle model and model year. 3. Click Map Coverage to display a list of
verified coverage areas on the most recent update.
4. Click Map Coverage Details to display a PDF document with a full listing of all coverage areas. u Adobe Reader is required for
viewing and printing the Portable Document Format (PDF) documents. To download the latest version of Adobe Reader, visit http:// get.adobe.com/reader/.
Obtaining a Navigation Update Acura is continually expanding the scope of the navigation system. Navigation system software upgrades may be made available periodically, usually in the fall of each year. To purchase an update: 1. Obtain your vehicles VIN number and the
System/Device Information. 2 System Device Information P. 351
2. Call the Acura Navigation Disc Fulfillment Center at (888) 549-3798, or order online at www.acuranavi.com (U.S.) or www.acuranavi.ca (Canada).
An update is not available from a dealer. However, the dealer may assist you in obtaining one for you out of courtesy. There is no program for free updates.
405
406
uuClient AssistanceuTraffic Information
R eferen
ce In fo
rm atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 406
Traffic Information Continuously updated traffic information is available in certain areas across the lower 48 U.S. states, Hawaii, and some cities in Canada.
Visit automobiles.honda.com/traffic for a complete listing of coverage areas and other information.
To find traffic information: 1. Visit www.acura.ca/owners/acuralink. 2. Select Real-Time Traffic on the MDX. 3. Click AcuraLink Real-Time Traffic.
U.S. models
Canadian models
Operation in Alaska, Hawaii, Canada, Puerto Rico, and Mexico
All roads displayed on the map screens are verified roads. Information in this manual relating to unverified roads or areas is not applicable.
Entering a destination address or place/ landmark on another island may result in a screen caution message. This is because there are no ferry routes between islands in the database.
If Street Name Guidance is set to On, the street names will not be read out by voice guidance. This may change in a future data update.
Map Coverage
Address and Place Entry Screens
Puerto Rico and Mexico
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 407
Legal Information
eferen ce In
fo rm
atio n
Copyrights Infogroup-Data: Certain business data
provided by Infogroup 2011, All Rights Reserved.
EXIT-Data: ZENRIN CO., LTD. 2011. All rights reserved.
Building foot print: ZENRIN CO., LTD. 2011. All rights reserved.
Junction View Data: ZENRIN USA, INC. 2011. All rights reserved.
Brand icon: The marks of companies displayed by this product to indicate business locations are the marks of their respective owners. The use of such marks in this product does not imply any sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such companies of this product.
User Agreements
In using this HDD Satellite Linked Navigation System (the HDD), which includes HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD. software, ALPINE ELECTRONICS, INC. software, and Here database contents (hereinafter referred to as Licensors), you are bound by the terms and conditions set forth below. By using your copy of the HDD, you have expressed your Agreement to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. You should, therefore, make sure that you read and understand the following provisions. If for any reason you do not wish to be bound by the terms of this Agreement, please return the HDD to your dealer. The HDD may not be copied, duplicated,
or otherwise modified, in whole or in part, without the express written permission of the Licensors.
The HDD may not be transferred or sublicensed to any third party for profit, rent or loan, or licensed for reuse in any manner.
Navigation System User Agreement
The HDD may not be decompiled, reverse engineered or otherwise disassembled, in whole or in part.
The HDD may not be used in a network or by any other manner of simultaneous use in multiple systems.
The HDD is intended solely for personal use (or internal use where the end-user is a business) by the consumer. The HDD is not to be used for commercial purposes.
The Licensors do not guarantee to the client that the functions included in the HDD meet the specific objectives of the user.
Licensor shall not be responsible for any damages caused by the use of the HDD to the actual user or to any third party.
The warranty on the HDD shall not extend to an exchange or refund due to misspelling, omission of letters, or any other cosmetic discrepancy in the contents of the HDD.
The right to use the HDD shall expire either when the user destroys the HDD or software, or when any of the terms of this Agreement are violated and the Licensors exercise the option to revoke the license to use the HDD or software.
407Continued
408
uuLegal InformationuUser Agreements
R eferen
ce In fo
rm atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 408
The terms and conditions hereof apply to all subsequent users and owners as well as to the original purchaser.
The logos of oil companies, hotels, convenience stores, and other businesses are displayed for your information and convenience, and in no way imply any sponsorship, approval or endorsement of these companies, or their products. The logos are trademarks of their respective owners.
The marks of companies displayed by this product to indicate business locations are the marks of their respective owners.
The use of such marks in this product does not imply any sponsorship, approval, or endorsement by such companies of this product.
The user shall indemnify and save harmless the Licensors, and their officers, employees and agents, from and against any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause of the claim, demand or action, alleging loss, costs, expense, damages or injuries (including injuries resulting in death) arising out of the use or possession of the HDD or software. Use, duplication, or disclosure of this HDD by or on behalf of the United States
government is subject to Restricted Rights as set forth at FAR 52.227-14, -19 or DFARS 252.227-7013, as applicable. Manufacturers are the Licensors, including HONDA MOTOR CO., LTD., 2-1-1 Minami Aoyama Minato-Ku Tokyo 107-8556 JAPAN., Alpine Electronics, Inc., 20-1 Yoshima Kogyodanchi, Iwaki, Fukushima 970-1192 JAPAN., Here Corporation, 425 W Randolph St. Chicago, IL 60606, USA.
You have acquired a device (DEVICE) that includes software licensed by Alpine Electronics, Inc. (collectively ALPINE) from an affiliate of Microsoft Corporation (collectively MS). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and online or electronic documentation (SOFTWARE) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT ALPINE
Navigation System END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE
This EULA grants you the following license: You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. ALPINE HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON ALPINE TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
uuLegal InformationuUser Agreements R
eferen ce In
fo rm
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 409
OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS.
NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
SPEECH RECOGNITION If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent in the process. Neither ALPINE nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
LIMITATIONS ON REVERSE ENGINEERING, DECOMPILATION, AND DISASSEMBLY You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE/SERVICES The SOFTWARE may permit ALPINE, MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates to provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements, add- on components, or Internet-base service components of the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the SOFTWARE (Supplemental Components). u If ALPINE provides or makes available
to you Supplemental Components and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
u If MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that MS, Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental Component(s) shall be licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
u ALPINE, MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates reserve the right to discontinue any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
RECOVERY MEDIA If SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE on separate media and labeled Recovery Media you may use the Recovery Media solely to restore or reinstall the SOFTWARE originally installed on the DEVICE.
UPGRADES If the SOFTWARE is provided by ALPINE separate from the DEVICE on separate media or via web download or other means, and is labeled For Upgrade Purposes Only you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
409Continued
410
uuLegal InformationuUser Agreements
R eferen
ce In fo
rm atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 410
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
TERMINATION Without prejudice to any other rights, ALPINE or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In such event, you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE and all of its component parts.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and applets, incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner and may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content. All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
TRADEMARKS This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of ALPINE MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to ALPINE support number
provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact ALPINE for any other reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and country destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information on exporting the SOFTWARE, see http:// www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
uuLegal InformationuUser Agreements R
eferen ce In
fo rm
atio n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 411
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, visit www.gracenote.com. When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums. Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs to display on the HDD. Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates a year. More information about Gracenote, its features, and downloads are available at www.honda.com (in U.S.) or www.honda.ca (in Canada).
Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by Gracenote logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (Gracenote). The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Software) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music- related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (Gracenote Data) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers) and to perform other
Gracenote END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions or this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non- commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
411Continued
412
uuLegal InformationuAs required by the FCC
R eferen
ce In fo
rm atio
n
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 412
its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS. Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error- free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. copyright 2000 to present Gracenote
As required by the FCC 1. This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and Canadian RSS-210/ RSSGen. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2. The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance may void the users authority to operate the equipment.
3. This product emits radio frequency energy, but the radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. This equipment complies with FCC and IC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact with the antenna during normal operation is minimized.
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 413
Voice Commands
13
Voice Commands .................................. 414 Voice Portal Screen .............................. 414 Navigation Commands......................... 415 Useful Commands................................ 416 Phone Commands................................ 416 Audio Commands ................................ 417 On Screen Commands ......................... 417 Music Search Commands ..................... 417 General Commands ............................. 418 Climate Control Commands................. 418 List of Categories ................................. 418
414
V o
ice C o
m m
an d
s
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 414
Voice Commands
Voice Portal Screen
When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say Voice Help after the beep or select Voice Help.
You can see the list of commands in Voice Info on the Info menu screen. Select Info, then select .
*1: U.S. models only
This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.
Call
This can be only used when the iPod or HDD device is connected.
Phone Call
Music Search
You can see a list of the available commands on the screen.
Navigation Commands Useful Commands Phone Commands Audio Commands On Screen Commands Music Search Commands General Commands Climate Control Commands All Commands Voice Settings Getting Started
The screen changes the navigation screen. Address (English only)*1
Place Name (English only)*1
Find Nearest POI Category Go Home Previous Destination Address Book Place Phone Number
Voice Help
Navigation
uuVoice CommandsuNavigation Commands V
o ice C
o m
m an
d s
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 415
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.
Audio On*1
Audio Off*1
FM AM SXM Disc HDD USB iPod Bluetooth Audio Pandora*
Aha AUX 2 Audio Commands P. 417
The screen changes the climate control screen.
2 Climate Control Commands P. 418
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.
Audio
Climate Control
* Not available on all models
Navigation Commands The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the navigation.
What time is it? What is todays date? Voice help (displays commands for current screen)
Find nearest (specify place): Fuel and auto Acura dealers Honda dealers Gas station Hydrogen station Auto parts & electronics Auto repair & maintenance Car wash & detailing Motorcycle dealers Other car dealers Roadside assistance ATM and bank ATM Bank
General Commands
Find Place Commands
Check cashing Currency exchange Community Business City hall Civic center Convention center Court house Higher education Library Post office School Emergency room Hospital Police station Veterinarian Lodging Bed & breakfast Hotel Resort Recreation Amusement park Golf course Historical monument Marina Movie theater Museum Park
415Continued
416
uuVoice CommandsuUseful Commands
V o
ice C o
m m
an d
s
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 416
Performing arts Sports complex Tourist attraction Restaurant American restaurant Californian restaurant Chinese restaurant Coffee shop Continental restaurant Fast food French restaurant German restaurant Greek restaurant Indian restaurant Italian restaurant Japanese restaurant Korean restaurant Mexican restaurant Pizza Seafood restaurant Thai restaurant Vegetarian restaurant Vietnamese restaurant Other restaurant Shopping Accessory store Book store Clothing store
Grocery store Home improvement store Mall Office supply store Pharmacy Pet food store Sewing store Shoe store Sporting goods store Toy store Travel center Airport Automobile club Bus station Camping Commuter rail station Ferry terminal Named place Park & ride Parking garage Parking lot Rental car agency Rest area Ski area Tourist information Train station Travel agency Truck stop
Useful Commands The system accepts these commands on the voice portal top screen.
Call
Phone Commands The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.
Call
NOTE: Contacts that are imported from your phone to the vehicle are all made available by voice.
uuVoice CommandsuAudio Commands V
o ice C
o m
m an
d s
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 417
Audio Commands The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.
Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM Radio FM preset <1-12>
Radio tune to <530-1710> AM Radio AM preset <1-6>
SXM channel <1-999> Radio SXM preset <1-12>
Disc play Disc play track <1-30>
HDD play HDD play track <1-30>
Radio FM Commands
Radio AM Commands
Radio SXM Commands
Disc Commands
HDD Commands
* Not available on all models
iPod play iPod play track <1-30>
USB play USB play track <1-30>
Bluetooth audio play NOTE: Bluetooth Audio commands may not work on some phones or Bluetooth Audio devices.
Pandora play
Aha radio play
AUX play
iPod Commands
USB Commands
Bluetooth Audio Commands
Pandora Commands*
Aha Commands
AUX Commands
On Screen Commands The system accepts the voice command operation of the voice recognition screen.
Music Search Commands The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen.
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you to select music from your HDD or iPod device using your voice. To activate this mode, you must push the talk switch and say: Music search.
Music search What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? What's playing? Who's playing? What album is this?
Using Song By Voice
Song By Voice Commands
417Continued
418
uuVoice CommandsuGeneral Commands
V o
ice C o
m m
an d
s
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 418
Play artist
List artist
General Commands What time is it? What is today's date?
Play Commands
List Commands
Climate Control Commands The system accepts these commands on the Climate control screen.
Climate Control Automatic Climate Control On*1
Climate Control Off*1
Air conditioner On*1
Air conditioner Off*1
Defrost On*1
Defrost Off*1
Vent Dash and Floor Floor Vents Floor and Defrost Fan Speed Up Fan Speed Down Fan Speed <1-7> Temperature Up Temperature Down Temperature Max Heat Temperature Max Cool Temperature <57-87> Degrees (U.S.) Temperature <18-32> Degrees (Canada)
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so the command may not match your intended action.
List of Categories The system accepts these commands (POI category name) on the dedicated screen.
Fuel/Auto ATM/Bank Community Emergency Lodging Recreation Restaurant Shopping Travel
Index
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 419
Index
In d
ex
Symbols a (Display Mode) Button ..................... 76 J (Hang-Up/Back) Button ....... 6, 24, 266 h (Pick-Up) Button ................................. 266 d (Talk) Button ............................ 6, 24, 266
Numbers 3D Angle Adjustment ................................ 79
A Acura Client Relations ............................. 404 AcuraLink Message .................................. 319 AcuraLink Subscription Status................. 324 AcuraLink................................................ 314 Address ..................................................... 128
Address Book............................................ 41 Avoided Area............................................ 62
Address Book Editing Address Book ................................ 41 Setting Destination ................................. 135
Address Book PIN ....................................... 49 AhaTM Radio.............................................. 398 AhaTM Radio Menu................................... 254 Audio
On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM ................. 5 Remote Control ...................................... 188 Settings .................................................. 190 Voice Commands List.............................. 417
Audio Menu Bluetooth Audio ................................... 262
Disc ......................................................... 220 FM/AM Radio .......................................... 194 HDD ........................................................ 227 Internet Radio.......................................... 251 iPod......................................................... 239 SiriusXM Radio ...................................... 200 USB Flash drive ........................................ 256
Audio System Theft Protection....................................... 185 USB Port .................................................. 183
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customize ............................................... 109
AUX Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 185
Avoid Streets............................................. 176 Avoided Area .............................................. 62
B Black Level .................................................. 28 Bluetooth Audio
Playing .................................................... 262 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink ..................... 266
Importing Phonebook Data...................... 275 Making a Call .......................................... 292 Pairing a Phone ....................................... 269 Phone Settings ........................................ 287 Receiving a Call ....................................... 298 Setting Up Speed Dialing ......................... 276
Brightness ................................................... 28
C Calculating the Route .............................. 151 Calendar.................................................... 350 Call History................................................ 296 Cancel Route............................................. 169 Category
Address Book............................................ 41 Setting Destination.................................. 137
Category History......................................... 51 Change Province....................................... 129 Change State ............................................ 129 Changing Your Destination..................... 177 Changing Your Route .............................. 168 City ............................................................ 131 Client Assistance....................................... 404 Clock Adjustment ....................................... 30 Color............................................................ 75 Continue Trip............................................ 180 Contrast ...................................................... 28 Coordinate................................................ 150 Correct Vehicle Position............................. 88 Current Location ........................................ 81 Current Position
Address Book............................................ 41 Map Input ............................................... 148
Customized Features.................................. 90
D Data Reset................................................. 123
419
420
In d
ex
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 420
Day Mode Color ......................................................... 75 Switching Display Mode............................. 76
Delete Tracking........................................... 87 Destination List
Adding Waypoint .................................... 170 Editing..................................................... 174
Detour ....................................................... 176 Dial ............................................................ 294 Directions .................................................. 163 Disc
Playing..................................................... 220 Display Settings........................................... 28 Display Tracking.......................................... 86
Driving..................................................... 158 Download POI
Editing Category........................................ 53 Importing Category ................................... 52 Setting Destination .................................. 145
Driving to Your Destination..................... 154
E Edit Go Home.............................................. 48 Edit POI Search Radius Along Route ......... 61 ENTER Button................................................ 7 Entering a Destination ............................. 126 Error Messages.......................................... 391
AhaTM Radio............................................. 398 CD Player................................................. 392 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio.................... 393 iPod/USB Flash Drive ................................ 394 Navigation System ................................... 391
Pandora................................................. 395 Estimated Time........................................... 70 Exit Info..................................................... 164
F Find Nearest Place .................................... 177 FM/AM Radio
Playing .................................................... 194 Preset Memory ........................................ 197
Folder List Disc......................................................... 224 USB Flash Drive ....................................... 261
G Go Home..................................................... 12 Go Home PIN .............................................. 49 Gracenote Info. Update ........................... 237 Guidance (Navi Settings)............................ 64 Guidance Mode .......................................... 65 Guidance Point ........................................... 69
H HDD
Playing .................................................... 227 Hide Traffic Flow ...................................... 163 Home Address ...................................... 12, 48 HomeLink Universal Transceiver............ 380 House Number.......................................... 134
I Import Phonebook Data.......................... 275 Interface Dial................................................ 7 Interface Settings ....................................... 28 Intersection .............................................. 147 iPod
Connecting, Disconnecting ..................... 239 Playing.................................................... 239
L Language Settings ..................................... 36 Legal Information .................................... 407 Lodging (Place Category) ........................ 137
M Map (Navi Settings) ................................... 71 Map Data Update
Checking Version.................................... 351 Obtaining Update Data ........................... 405
Map Input Avoided Area............................................ 62 Setting Destination ................................. 148
Map Legend ........................................... 9, 82 Map Menu ................................................ 161 Map Screen............................................... 154
Changing View ......................................... 78 Icon ...................................................... 9, 84 Scale......................................................... 83
MENU Button Changing Route...................................... 168
In d
ex
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 421
Entering a Destination............................. 126 Microphone .............................................. 266 Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 353 Music Search
HDD ....................................................... 232 How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/AAC)............................ 224
iPod ........................................................ 245 Song By Voice......................................... 247 USB ........................................................ 261
N NAV Button .......................................... 11, 65 Navigation Menu (Destination) .............. 126 Navigation Menu (Route Option) ........... 168 Night Mode
Color ........................................................ 75 Switching Display Mode............................ 76
Non-map Screens ....................................... 68
O On Demand Multi-Use DisplayTM
Basic Operation........................................... 5 Customizing Audio Source...................... 187 Screen Settings ......................................... 89 Shortcuts .................................. 46, 186, 279 Sound..................................................... 193
P Pairing a Phone ........................................ 269
Pandora ................................................... 252 Personal Information ................................. 40 PHONE Button .......................................... 266 Phone Settings .......................................... 287 Phonebook
Importing ................................................ 275 Making a Call .......................................... 293
PIN Numbers ............................................... 49 Place Category
Address Book ............................................ 41 Setting Destination .................................. 137
Place Name Address Book ............................................ 41 Setting Destination .................................. 141
Place Phone Number Address Book ............................................ 41 Setting Destination .................................. 144
Postal Code ............................................... 130 Power Distribution Monitor .................... 347 Previous Destinations
Address Book ............................................ 41 Deleting .................................................... 50 Setting Destination .................................. 136
R Radio
FM/AM.................................................... 194 SiriusXM ................................................ 200
Random Disc ......................................................... 222 HDD ........................................................ 230 USB Flash Drive........................................ 259
Rear Entertainment System ............... 16, 325 Auxiliary Console Panel ........................... 326 Front Control Panel Operation................. 338 HDMI Input Jack .................................... 327 Playable Discs .......................................... 328 Rear Control Panel Operation .................. 329 Wireless Headphones .............................. 342
Rearview Camera ..................................... 353 Repeat
Disc......................................................... 222 HDD........................................................ 230 iPod ........................................................ 243 USB Flash Drive ....................................... 259
Resuming Your Trip ................................. 180 Roadside Assistance ................................. 307 Route Preference........................................ 56 Routing ....................................................... 55
S Scan
Disc......................................................... 222 FM/AM Radio .................................. 198, 199 HDD........................................................ 230 SiriusXM Radio ...................................... 215 USB Flash Drive ....................................... 259
Scenic Route ............................................. 146 Schedule
Calendar ................................................. 350 Search Along ............................................ 171 Search Around.......................................... 171 Search by Name........................................ 138
421
422
In d
ex
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 422
Search by name Place Category......................................... 137
Search Nearby ........................................... 177 Security PIN Code...................................... 400 SETTINGS Button........................................... 4 Show Icon on Map...................................... 73 Shuffle
iPod......................................................... 243 Siri Eyes Free ............................................... 27 SiriusXM Radio
Playing..................................................... 200 Preset Memory ........................................ 203 Replay Function ....................................... 205 Settings ................................................... 190 SportsFlashTM Alert................................... 209
Song By VoiceTM
Searching Music ...................................... 247 Setting..................................................... 246
Sort by Distance to Travel ........................ 137 Sound and Beep Settings ........................... 29 Sound Setup.............................................. 193 Speed Dial
Making a Call .......................................... 297 Registering .............................................. 277
Start-up ....................................................... 22 Steering Wheel Controls .......................... 188 Straight Line Guide..................................... 80 Street ......................................................... 132 Street Name Guidance ............................... 67 Surround View Camera ............................ 355 System Device Information ...................... 351 System Initialization ................................. 400
System Limitations ................................... 402
T Text/E-mail Message................................. 300 Traffic Incidents ........................................ 166 Traffic List ................................................. 166 Traffic Rerouting ...................................... 165
Auto Reroute .......................................... 165 Navi Settings ............................................. 60
Trip Computer .......................................... 346 Troubleshooting ......................... 18, 377, 384
U Unit Settings ............................................... 35 Unverified Routing..................................... 58 Update System Software
Obtaining Update Data ........................... 405 USB Flash Drive
Connecting, Disconnecting...................... 256 Playing .................................................... 256 Voice Commands List ...................... 417, 418
USB Port .................................................... 183
V View (Navi Settings) ................................... 78 View Routes.............................................. 153 Viewing the Routes .................................. 153 Voice
Map Menu .............................................. 159
Voice Commands Help.......................................................... 17 Voice Commands List.............................. 414 Voice Control System................................ 24
Voice Control Operation Basic Operation........................................... 6 Voice Portal ................................................ 6
Voice Recognition Settings ....................... 26 Voice Tag
Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 282 Registering a Voice Tag to a Speed Dial Entry ..................................................... 277
Volume HFL Buttons ............................................ 266 Map Menu.............................................. 161 Sound and Beep Settings .......................... 29 Voice Recognition Settings........................ 26
W Wallpaper Settings .................................... 32 Waypoint
Adding ................................................... 170 Editing .................................................... 174
Z Zip Code ................................................... 130
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 423
17 ACURA MDX NAVI (E-AWD)-31TRX8000.book 424
Related manuals for Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the MDX Sport Hybrid Acura works, you can view and download the Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Navigation Manual for Acura MDX Sport Hybrid as well as other Acura manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Navigation Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Acura MDX Sport Hybrid. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Acura MDX Sport Hybrid 2017 SUV Navigation Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.